MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
FR-E 500
Frequency Inverter
Instruction Manual
FR-E 520S EC,
FR-E 540 EC
Art. no.: 125256
01 07 2001
Version F
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Transistorized inverter.
This instruction manual gives handling information and precautions for use of this
equipment.
Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter,
please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.
Please forward this manual to the end user.
This section is specifically about safety matters
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you have read
through this instruction manual and appended documents carefully and can use the
equipment correctly.
Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety
information and instructions.
In this manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and
"CAUTION".
WARNING
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous
conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
CAUTION
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous
conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury, or may
cause physical damage only.
Note that even the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to
conditions. Please follow the instructions of both levels because they are important
to personnel safety.
A-1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1. Electric Shock Prevention
WARNING
! While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover.
You may get an electric shock.
! Do not run the inverter with the front cover removed. Otherwise, you may access
the exposed high-voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry and get
an electric shock.
! If power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic
inspection. You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric
shock.
! Before starting wiring or inspection, switch power off, wait for more than 10
minutes, and check for residual voltage with a meter (refer to chapter 2 for
further details) etc.
! Earth the Inverter.
! Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of this equipment should
be fully competent to do the work.
! Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric
shock or be injured.
! Operate the switches and potentiometers with dry hands to prevent an electric
shock.
! Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or
pinching. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
! Do not change the cooling fan while power is on.
It is dangerous to change the cooling fan while power is on.
2. Fire Prevention
CAUTION
! Mount the inverter and brake resistor on an incombustible surface. Installing the
inverter directly on or near a combustible surface could lead to a fire.
! If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power. A continuous flow
of large current could cause a fire.
! When a brake resistor is used, use an alarm signal to switch power off.
Otherwise, the brake resistor will overheat abnormally due a brake transistor or
other fault, resulting in a fire.
! Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals +, −. This could cause a
fire.
A-2
3. Injury Prevention
CAUTION
! Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal to
prevent damage etc.
! Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise,
damage etc. may occur.
! Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage etc.
! While power is on and for some time after power-off, do not touch the inverter or
brake resistor as they are hot and you may get burnt.
4. Additional instructions
Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric shock, etc.
(1) Transportation and installation
CAUTION
Environment
! When carrying products, use correct lifting gear to prevent injury.
! Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended.
! Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the
inverter. Install according to the information in the Instruction Manual.
! Do not operate if the inverter is damaged or has parts missing.
! Do not hold the inverter by the front cover or operation panel; it may fall off.
! Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the inverter.
! Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct.
! Prevent screws, wire fragments or other conductive bodies or oil or other
flammable substance from entering the inverter.
! Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact.
! Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions:
Ambient
Constant torque : -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
temperature
Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage
-20°C to +65°C *
temperature
Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust
Ambience
and dirt)
Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation. After
Altitude, vibration that derate by 3% for every extra 500m up to 2500m (91%).
5.9m/s2 or less (conforming to JIS C 0040)
*Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
A-3
(2) Wiring
CAUTION
! Do not fit capacitive equipment such as power factor correction capacitor, radio
noise filter or surge suppressor to the output of the inverter.
! The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect
the direction of rotation of the motor.
(3) Trial run
CAUTION
! Check all parameters, and ensure that the machine will not be damaged by a
sudden start-up.
(4) Operation
WARNING
! When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as it
will restart suddenly after an alarm stop.
! The [STOP] key is valid only when the appropriate function setting has been
made. Prepare an emergency stop switch separately.
! Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure
to do so may restart the motor suddenly.
! The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any
other electrical equipment to the inverter output may damage the equipment.
! Do not modify the equipment.
A-4
CAUTION
! The electronic overcurrent protection does not guarantee protection of the motor
from overheating.
! Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent
starting/stopping of the inverter.
! Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise
nearby electronic equipment may be affected.
! Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power harmonics from the
inverter may heat/damage the power capacitor and generator.
! When a 400V class motor is inverter-driven, it should be insulation-enhanced or
surge voltages suppressed. Surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants
may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
! When parameter clear or all clear is performed, each parameter returns to the
factory setting. Re-set the required parameters before starting operation.
! The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its
setting, fully examine the performances of the motor and machine.
! In addition to the inverter's holding function, install a holding device to ensure
safety.
! Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period, always
perform inspection and test operation.
(5) Emergency stop
CAUTION
! Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the
machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
CAUTION
! Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the
inverter.
(7) Disposing of the inverter
CAUTION
! Treat as industrial waste.
(8) General instructions
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter
without a cover, or partially open. Never operate the inverter like this. Always
replace the cover and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter.
A-5
1 OUTLINE
1
1.1 Pre-Operation Information ..........................................................................................1
1.1.1 Precautions for operation .....................................................................................1
1.2 Basic Configuration.....................................................................................................3
1.2.1 Basic configuration ...............................................................................................3
1.3 Structure .....................................................................................................................4
1.3.1 Appearance and structure ....................................................................................4
1.3.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover .......................................................5
1.3.3 Removal and reinstallation of the wiring cover .....................................................6
1.3.4 Removal and reinstallation of the accessory cover ..............................................7
1.3.5 Reinstallation and removal of the control panel....................................................8
1.3.6 Removal of the operation panel (FR-PA02-02) front cover .................................10
1.3.7 Exploded view ....................................................................................................10
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
11
2.1 Installation.................................................................................................................11
2.1.1 Instructions for installation..................................................................................11
2.2 Wiring........................................................................................................................13
2.2.1 Terminal connection diagram (when source logic is selected) ...........................13
2.2.2 Wiring of the Main Circuit ...................................................................................17
2.2.3 Wiring of the control circuit .................................................................................22
2.2.4 Connection to the PU connector ........................................................................26
2.2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units ..............................................................29
2.2.6 Design information .............................................................................................31
2.3 Other wiring...............................................................................................................32
2.3.1 Power supply harmonics ....................................................................................32
2.3.2 Inverter-generated noise and reduction techniques ...........................................33
2.3.3 Leakage currents and countermeasures ............................................................37
2.3.4 Inverter-driven 400V class motor........................................................................38
2.3.5 Peripheral devices..............................................................................................39
2.3.6 Instructions for compliance with U.S. and Canadian Electrical Codes ..............43
2.3.7 Instructions for compliance with the European standards ..................................44
I
Contents
CONTENTS
3 OPERATION/CONTROL
46
3.1 Pre-Operation Information ........................................................................................46
3.1.1 Types of operation modes..................................................................................46
3.1.2 Power on ............................................................................................................48
3.2 About the Control Panel............................................................................................49
3.2.1 Names and functions of the control panel (FR-PA02-02) ...................................49
3.2.2 Control panel mode is changed by pressing the
MODE
key .................................50
3.2.3 Monitoring...........................................................................................................50
3.2.4 Frequency setting ...............................................................................................51
3.2.5 Parameter setting method ..................................................................................51
3.2.6 Operation mode..................................................................................................53
3.2.7 Help mode ..........................................................................................................53
3.3 Operation ..................................................................................................................55
3.3.1 Pre-operation checks .........................................................................................55
3.3.2 External operation mode (Operation using the external
frequency setting potentiometer and external start signal) .................................56
3.3.3 PU operation mode (Operation using the control panel) ....................................57
3.3.4 Combined operation mode 1 (Operation using both external
start signal and control panel) ............................................................................58
3.3.5 Combined operation mode 2 ..............................................................................59
4 PARAMETERS
60
4.1 Parameter List...........................................................................................................60
4.1.1 Parameter list .....................................................................................................60
4.1.2 List of Parameters Classified by Purpose of Use ...............................................66
4.1.3 Parameters recommended to be set by the user ...............................................68
4.2 Parameter Function Details ......................................................................................69
4.2.1 Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46)................................................................................69
4.2.2 Output frequency range (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)......................................................70
4.2.3 Base frequency, base frequency voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47) .........................71
4.2.4 Multi-speed operation
(Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239) ......................................72
4.2.5 Acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45) .......73
4.2.6 Electronic overcurrent protection (Pr. 9, Pr. 48) .................................................75
II
4.2.8 Starting frequency (Pr. 13) .................................................................................77
4.2.9 Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) ...........................................................................78
4.2.10 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) ...........................................................................79
4.2.11 Stall prevention (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66).............................................................80
4.2.12 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29) ........................................................82
4.2.13 Regenerative brake duty (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)..........................................................83
4.2.14 Frequency jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36) ....................................................................84
4.2.15 Speed display (Pr. 37)......................................................................................85
4.2.16 Frequency at 5V (10V) input (Pr. 38)................................................................86
4.2.17 Frequency at 20mA input (Pr. 39) ....................................................................86
4.2.18 Up-to-frequency sensitivity (Pr. 41) ..................................................................87
4.2.19 Output frequency detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43)......................................................88
4.2.20 Monitor display (Pr. 52, Pr. 158).......................................................................89
4.2.21 Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56) ................................................................91
4.2.22 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57, Pr. 58).................92
4.2.23 Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59)........................................................93
4.2.24 Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 60 to Pr. 63)..............................95
4.2.25 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ............................................................96
4.2.26 Applied motor (Pr. 71) ......................................................................................98
4.2.27 PWM carrier frequency (Pr. 72, Pr. 240) ..........................................................99
4.2.28 Voltage input (Pr. 73, Pr. 254)........................................................................100
4.2.29 Input filter time constant (Pr. 74) ....................................................................102
4.2.30 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) .........102
4.2.31 Parameter write inhibit selection (Pr. 77)........................................................104
4.2.32 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78) ...............................................105
4.2.33 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79) .................................................................106
4.2.34 General-purpose magnetic flux vector control selection (Pr. 80).........................110
4.2.35 Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96)..........................111
4.2.36 Computer link operation (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 338 to Pr. 340, Pr. 342) ......117
4.2.37 PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134) ......................................................................134
4.2.38 Output current detection function (Pr. 150, Pr. 151).......................................142
4.2.39 Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153)........................................................143
4.2.40 Stall prevention function and current limit function (Pr. 156) ..........................144
4.2.41 User group selection (Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176) .........................................146
III
Contents
4.2.7 DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)...................................................................76
4.2.42 Actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 171) ...................................................148
4.2.43 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183) .....................................148
4.2.44 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192)...................................150
4.2.45 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) .......................................................151
4.2.46 Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247) ..........................................................152
4.2.47 Stop selection (Pr. 250)..................................................................................153
4.2.48 Output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251) ........................................154
4.2.49 Meter (frequency meter) calibration (Pr. 901).................................................155
4.2.50 Biases and gains of the frequency setting voltage (current)
(Pr. 902 to Pr. 905)..........................................................................................157
5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
163
5.1 Errors (Alarms)........................................................................................................163
5.1.1 Error (alarm) definitions....................................................................................163
5.1.2 To know the operating status at the occurrence of alarm.................................171
5.1.3 Correspondence between digital and actual characters...................................171
5.1.4 Resetting the inverter .......................................................................................171
5.2 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................172
5.2.1 Motor remains stopped.....................................................................................172
5.2.2 Motor rotates in opposite direction ...................................................................172
5.2.3 Speed greatly differs from the setting...............................................................173
5.2.4 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth...........................................................173
5.2.5 Motor current is large........................................................................................173
5.2.6 Speed does not increase..................................................................................173
5.2.7 Speed varies during operation..........................................................................173
5.2.8 Operation mode is not changed properly .........................................................174
5.2.9 Control panel display is not operating ..............................................................174
5.2.10 POWER lamp is not lit....................................................................................174
5.2.11 Parameter write cannot be performed ............................................................174
5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection..........................................................175
5.3.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection ...................................................175
5.3.2 Check items......................................................................................................175
5.3.3 Periodic inspection ...........................................................................................175
5.3.4 Insulation resistance test using megger ...........................................................176
5.3.5 Pressure test ....................................................................................................176
IV
5.3.7 Replacement of parts .......................................................................................180
5.3.8 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers............................184
6 SPECIFICATIONS
186
6.1 Standard Specifications ..........................................................................................186
6.1.1 Model specifications .........................................................................................186
6.1.2 Common specifications ....................................................................................188
6.1.3 Outline drawings...............................................................................................190
APPENDIX
192
Appendix 1 Data Code List ...........................................................................................192
Appendix 2 When using the communicaton option.......................................................196
V
Contents
5.3.6 Daily and Periodic Inspection ...........................................................................177
C H A P T E R 1
1
CHAPTER
O OUTLINE
U T L IN E
This chapter gives information on the basic "outline" of this
product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
1.1 Pre-Operation Information .......................................... 1
1.2 Basic Configuration..................................................... 3
Chapter 1
1.3 Structure ..................................................................... 4
Chapter 2
<Abbreviations>
! PU
Control panel and parameter
unit (FR-PU04)
! Inverter
Mitsubishi transistorized inverter
FR-E500 series
! Pr.
Parameter number
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
1.1 Pre-Operation Information
OUTLINE
1 OUTLINE
1.1 Pre-Operation Information
1.1.1 Precautions for operation
This manual is written for the FR-E500 series transistorized inverters.
Incorrect handling may cause the inverter to operate incorrectly, causing its life to be
reduced considerably, or at the worst, the inverter to be damaged. Handle the inverter
properly in accordance with the information in each section as well as the precautions
and instructions of this manual to use it correctly.
For handling information on the parameter unit (FR-PU04), stand-alone options, etc.,
refer to the corresponding manuals.
(1) Unpacking and product check
Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate
on the inverter side face to ensure that the product agrees with your order and the
inverter is intact.
1) Inverter type
Rating plate
Capacity plate
MITSUBISHI
Capacity plate
MODEL
Input rating
FR-E540-0.4K-EC
Output rating
Serial number
Inverter type Serial number
INPUT
INVERTER
FR-E540-0.4K-EC
: XXXXX
Inverter
type
OUTPUT : XXXXX
SERIAL :
PASSED
Rating plate
" Inverter type
FR - E540 Symbol Voltage Class
E540
Three-phase
400V class
E520S
Single-phase
200V class
0.4
K - EC
Represents the
inverter capacity
"kW ".
2) Accessory
Instruction manual
If you have found any discrepancy, damage, etc., please contact your sales
representative.
1
OUTLINE
(2) Preparation of instruments and parts required for operation
Instruments and parts to be prepared depend on how the inverter is operated. Prepare
equipment and parts as necessary. (Refer to page 46.)
(3) Installation
To operate the inverter with high performance for a long time, install the inverter in a
proper place, in the correct direction, with proper clearances. (Refer to page 11.)
(4) Wiring
Connect the power supply, motor and operation signals (control signals) to the terminal
block. Note that incorrect connection may damage the inverter and peripheral devices.
(See page 13.)
1
2
1.2 Basic Configuration
OUTLINE
1.2 Basic Configuration
1.2.1 Basic configuration
The following devices are required to operate the inverter. Proper peripheral devices
must be selected and correct connections made to ensure proper operation. Incorrect
system configuration and connections can cause the inverter to operate improperly, its
life to be reduced considerably, and in the worst case, the inverter to be damaged.
Please handle the inverter properly in accordance with the information in each section
as well as the precautions and instructions of this manual. (For connections of the
peripheral devices, refer to the corresponding manuals.)
Name
(NFB)
or
(ELB)
Power
supply
Earth leakage
circuit
breaker or
no-fuse
breaker
The breaker should be selected with
care since a large inrush current flows
in the inverter at power on. (Refer to
page 39.)
Do not use this magnetic contactor to
start or stop the inverter. It might reduce
the inverter life. (Refer to page 39.)
The reactors must be used when the
power factor is to be improved or the
inverter is installed near a large power
Reactors
supply system (1000KVA or more and
wiring distance within 10m). Make
selection carefully.
To reduce mains conducted emissions.
Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines
EMC Filter
manual.
•The inverter life is influenced by
ambient temperature. The ambient
temperature should be as low as
possible within the permissible
range. This must be noted especially
when the inverter is installed in an
Inverter
enclosure. (Refer to page 11.)
•Wrong wiring might lead to inverter
damage. The control signal lines
should be kept away from the main
circuit to protect them from noise.
(Refer to page 13.)
Do not connect a power capacitor,
Devices
connected to surge suppressor or radio noise
filter to the output side.
the output
To prevent an electric shock, always
earth (ground) the motor and inverter.
The ground wiring from the power line
of the inverter as an induction noise
Earth
reduction technique is recommended to
(ground)
be run by returning it to the ground
terminal of the inverter. (Refer to page
36)
Magnetic
contactor
(MC)
AC reactor
(FR-BAL)
DC reactor
(FR-BEL)
Earth (ground)
Earth (ground)
Description
Use the power supply within the
permissible power supply specifications
of the inverter. (Refer to page 186.)
3
1.3 Structure
OUTLINE
1.3 Structure
1.3.1 Appearance and structure
(1) Front view
Accessory cover
Front cover
Capacity plate
Rating plate
Wiring port cover
for option
(2) Without front cover and accessory cover
1
PU connector*
Inboard option
mounting position
POWER lamp (yellow)
ALARM lamp (red)
Connector for connection
of inboard option
Control circuit terminal block
Control logic changing
connector
Main circuit terminal block
Wiring cover
*The PU connector is used for connection of the FR-PA02-02 or FR-PU04 option or to make RS-485
communication.
4
OUTLINE
1.3.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
" Removal
The front cover is fixed with catches in positions A, B and C.
Push A and B in the directions of arrows at the same time and remove the
cover using C as supporting points.
1)
A
C
B
2)
3)
C
" Reinstallation
When reinstalling the front cover after wiring, fix the catches securely.
With the front cover removed, do not switch power on.
Note: 1. Make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely.
2. The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover
and the rating plate of the inverter. Before reinstalling the front cover, check
the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the
inverter from where it was removed.
5
OUTLINE
1.3.3 Removal and reinstallation of the wiring cover
" Removal
Remove the wiring cover by pulling it in the direction of arrow A.
A
Wiring hole
" Reinstallation
1
Pass the cables through the wiring hole and reinstall the cover in the original
position.
6
OUTLINE
1.3.4 Removal and reinstallation of the accessory cover
" Removal
Hold down the portion A indicated by the arrow and lift the right hand side
using the portion B indicated by the arrow as a support, and pull out the
accessory cover to the right.
B
2)
1)
3)
A
" Reinstallation
Insert the mounting catch (left hand side) of the accessory cover into the
mounting position of the inverter and push in the right hand side mounting
catch to install the accessory cover.
Mounting position
Accessory cover
1)
A
Catch
2)
3)
7
OUTLINE
1.3.5 Reinstallation and removal of the control panel
To ensure safety, reinstall and remove the optional control panel (FR-PA02-02) after
switching power off.
The charging area and control printed board are exposed on the rear surface of the
control panel. When removing the control panel, always fit the rear cover option
FR-E5P. Never touch the control printed board because touching it can cause the
inverter to fail.
" Reinstallation
Insert the mounting catch (left hand side) of the accessory cover into the
mounting position of the inverter and push in the right hand side mounting
catch to install the accessory cover.
Mounting position
FR-PA02-02
1
A
Catch
1)
2)
3)
" Removal of the control panel
Hold down the portion A indicated by the arrow and lift the right hand side
using the portion B indicated by the arrow as a support, and pull out the
accessory cover to the right.
1)
2)
B
3)
A
(If the above procedure is not used for removal, the internal connector may be
damaged by the force applied.)
8
OUTLINE
" Using the connection cable for operation
1) Fit the rear cover option FR-E5P to the back surface of the control panel.
2) Securely plug one end of the connection cable into the PU connector of the
inverter and the other end into the adaptor of the FR-E5P option to connect it
to the control panel. (For the connection cable of the FR-E5P, refer to page
26.)
PU connector
(RS-485 cable specifications)
" Mounting the control panel on an enclosure
When you open the control panel front cover, the screw mounting guides for
fixing the control panel to an enclosure appear on the top left and bottom right.
Fit the rear cover of the FR-E5P option, drill holes in the control panel mounting
guides, and securely mount the control panel on the enclosure with screws.
9
OUTLINE
1.3.6 Removal of the operation panel (FR-PA02-02) front cover
1) Open the control panel front cover to 90 degrees.
2) Pull out the control panel front cover to the left to remove it.
90 degrees
1.3.7 Exploded view
1
Control panel(FR-PA02-02)
Front cover
Accessory
cover
Wiring port cover
for option
Wiring cover
10
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION AND
AND
WIRING
WIRING
This chapter gives information on the basic "installation and
wiring" for use of this product.
Always read the instructions in this chapter before using the
equipment.
2.1 Installation ....................................................................11
Chapter 1
2.2 Wiring ...........................................................................13
2.3 Other Wiring .................................................................32
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
2.1 Installation
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.1 Installation
2.1.1 Instructions for installation
1) Handle the unit carefully.
The inverter uses plastic parts. Handle it gently to protect it from damage.
Also, hold the unit with even strength and do not apply too much strength to the front
cover alone.
2) Install the inverter in a place where it is not affected by vibration easily (5.9m/s
maximum).
Note the vibration of a cart, press, etc.
2
3) Note on ambient temperature.
The inverter life is under great influence of ambient temperature. In the place of
installation, ambient temperature must be within the permissible range –10 °C to
+50°C. Check that the ambient temperature is within that range in the positions
shown in figure 3).
4) Install the inverter on a non-combustible surface.
The inverter will be very hot (maximum about 150°C). Install it on a non-combustible
surface (e.g. metal). Also leave sufficient clearances around the inverter.
5) Avoid high temperature and high humidity.
Avoid direct sunlight and places of high temperature and high humidity.
6) Avoid places where the inverter is exposed to oil mist, flammable gases, fluff, dust,
dirt etc.
Install the inverter in a clean place or inside a "totally enclosed" panel which does
not accept any suspended matter.
7) Note the cooling method when the inverter is installed in an enclosure.
When two or more inverters are installed or a ventilation fan is mounted in an
enclosure, the inverters and ventilation fan must be installed in proper positions with
extreme care taken to keep the ambient temperatures of the inverters with the
permissible values. If they are installed in improper positions, the ambient
temperatures of the inverters will rise and ventilation effect will be reduced.
8) Install the inverter securely in the vertical direction with screws or bolts.
11
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
3) Note on ambient
temperatures
4) Clearances around the inverter
10cm
or more
Measurement
position
5cm
5cm
FR-E500
5cm
1cm or
more*
Leave sufficient
clearances above Cooling air
and under the
inverter to ensure
adequate ventilation.
1cm or
more*
10cm
or more
FR-E500
Measurement position
Cooling fan
built in the
inverter
*5cm or more for 5.5K and 7.5K
These clearances are also necessary for changing the cooling fan.
7) For installation in an enclosure
Ventilation
fan
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
(Correct example) (Incorrect example)
Position of Ventilation Fan
Built-in cooling fan
(Incorrect example)
(Correct example)
When more than one inverter is contained
8) Vertical mounting
2
12
2.2 Wiring
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.2 Wiring
2.2.1 Terminal connection diagram (when source logic is selected)
" 3-phase 400V power input
NFB
MC
3-phase AC
power supply
L1
L2
L3
IM
Earth(Ground)
Control input signals
(no voltage input allowed)
P1
24VDC power output and
contact input common
+
PC
Note 4
Forward rotation start
STF
Reverse rotation start
STR
Multi-speed selection
Motor
U
V
W
High
RH
Middle
RM
Low
RL
PR
−
External transistor common and
24VDC power output common
B
C
4 to 20mADC(+)
Alarm
output
RES
RUN
SD
Note 3
FU
SE
Note 2
Frequency setting signals (analog)
3
(Note 1)
2
Frequency
setting
potentiometer1
1/2W1kΩ Current input(−)
Brake resistor connection
A
Output stop MRS
Reset
Jumper
Remove this jumper when
using the optional power-factor
improving DC reactor.
Running
Frequency detection
Open collector
output common)
Open
collector outputs
10(+5V)
2 0 to 5VDC Selected
0 to 10VDC
5(Analog common)
Note 3
AM
5
Note 2
(+) Analog signal output
(−) (0 to 10VDC)
4(4 to 20mADC)
PU connector
(RS-485)
Earth(Ground)
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit input terminal
Control circuit output terminal
Note: 1. If the potentiometer is to be operated often, use a 2W1kΩ potentiometer.
2. Terminals 5, SD and SE are isolated.
3. Terminals SD and 5 are common terminals. Do not earth them to the
ground.
4. When terminals PC-SD are used as a 24VDC power supply, be careful not
to short these terminals. If they are shorted, the inverter will be damaged.
13
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
" Single-phase 200V power input
NFB
MC
U
V
W
L1
N
Power supply
Motor
IM
Earth(Ground)
Note: 1. To ensure safety, connect the power input to the inverter via a magnetic
contactor and earth leakage circuit breaker or no-fuse breaker, and use the
magnetic contactor to switch power on-off.
2. The output is three-phase 200V.
(1) Description of the main circuit terminals
Symbol
Terminal Name
L1, L2, L3
AC power input
(Note)
U, V, W
+, PR
+, −
+, P1
Inverter output
Brake resistor
connection
Brake unit
connection
Power factor
improving DC
reactor connection
Earth (Ground)
Description
Connect to the commercial power supply.
Keep these terminals unconnected when using the high
power factor converter.
Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.
Connect the optional brake resistor across terminals + PR.
Connect the optional brake unit or high power factor
converter.
Disconnect the jumper from terminals + - P1 and connect
the optional power factor improving DC reactor.
For earthing the inverter chassis. Must be earthed.
Note: L1, N terminals for single-phase power input.
14
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(2) Description of the control circuit terminals
Type Symbol
STF
Input signals
Contact input
STR
Reverse
rotation start
RH, RM, Multi-speed
RL
selection
MRS
Output stop
RES
Reset
SD
Contact input
common and
external
transistor
common
(sink*)
PC
Power output
Contact input
common
(source*)
10
Analog
Frequency setting
Terminal
Name
Forward
rotation start
Frequency
setting power
supply
Description
Turn on the STF signal to start forward When the STF
and STR signals
rotation and turn it off to stop.
are turned on
Turn on the STR signal to start reverse simultaneously,
the stop command
rotation and turn it off to stop.
is given.
Combine the RH, RM and RL signals as
appropriate to select multiple speeds.
Input terminal
Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or function choices
(Pr. 180 to
longer) to stop the inverter output.
Used to shut off the inverter output to Pr. 183) change
bring the motor to a stop by the terminal functions.
electromagnetic brake.
Used to reset the protective circuit activated. Turn on the
RES signal for more than 0.1 second then turn it off.
When transistor output (open collector output), such as a
programmable controller (PLC), is connected, connect the
external power supply common for transistor output to this
terminal to prevent a fault caused by undesirable current.
Common to the contact input terminals. Common output
terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power output (PC terminal).
This terminal becomes common to the contact input
terminals when sink logic is selected.
Please see page 23 for the logic changing method.
This terminal can be used as a 24VDC, 0.1A power
output.
This terminal becomes external transistor common when
sink logic is selected.
Please see page 23 for the logic changing method.
5VDC, permissible load current 10mA
By entering 0 to 5VDC (0 to 10VDC), the maximum output
frequency is reached at 5V (or 10V) and I/O are
proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch between input 0 to
2
5VDC (factory setting) and 0 to 10VDC. Input resistance
10kΩ. Maximum permissible voltage 20V.
By entering 4 to 20mADC, the maximum output frequency
Frequency
is reached at 20mA and I/O are proportional. This input
signal is valid only when the AU signal (Note) is on. Input
setting
4
resistance approximately 250Ω. Maximum permissible
(current)
current 30mA.
Common terminal for the frequency setting signal (terminal 2,
Frequency
1 or 4) and analog output terminal AM.
setting input
5
Do not connect to the earth (ground).
common
Note: Assign the AU signal to any of the terminals using the input terminal function selection
(Pr. 180 to Pr. 183).
* Used as a contact input signal common terminal by switching between sink logic and source
logic. (Refer to page 23.)
Frequency
setting
(voltage)
15
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Output signals
Open collector
Contact
Type Symbol
A, B, C
RUN
FU
Analog
AM
Communication
RS-485
SE

Terminal
Name
Alarm output
Inverter
running
Frequency
detection
Description
Change-over contact output indicating that
the output has been stopped by the inverter
protective function activated. 230VAC 0.3A,
30VDC 0.3A. Alarm: discontinuity across B-C
(continuity across A-C), normal: continuity
across B-C (discontinuity across A-C).
Switched low when the inverter output
frequency is equal to or higher than the
starting frequency (factory set to 0.5Hz,
variable). Switched high during stop or DC
injection brake operation (*1).
Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A.
Switched low when the output frequency has
reached or exceeded the detection frequency
set as appropriate. Switched high when below
the detection frequency (*1).
Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A
Output
terminal
function
choices
(Pr. 190 to
Pr. 192)
change
terminal
functions.
Open collector
Common to the RUN and FU terminals.
output common
One selected from output
frequency, motor current
Factory setting of output item:
and output voltage is
Analog signal
Frequency permissible load
output (*2). The output
output
current 1mA Output signal 0 to
signal is proportional to
10VDC
the magnitude of each
monitoring item.
With the control panel connector, communication can be
made using the RS-485 protocol.
! Conforming Standard : EIA Standard RS-485
PU connector
! Transmission format : Multi-drop link
! Communication speed : Maximum 19200bps
: 500m
! Overall length
*1: Low indicates that the open collector output transistor is on (conducts). High
indicates that the transistor is off (does not conduct).
*2: Not output during inverter resetting.
16
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.2.2 Wiring of the Main Circuit
(1) Wiring instructions
1) It is recommended to use insulation-sleeved solderless terminals for power supply
and motor wiring.
2) Power must not be applied to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter.
Otherwise the inverter will be damaged.
3) After wiring, wire off-cuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire off-cuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in a control box etc., be careful so that chips and
others do not enter the inverter.
4) Use thick cables to make the voltage drop 2% or less.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable
voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease, especially at the output of a low
frequency. (A selection example for the wiring length of 20m is shown on page 19.)
5) For long distance wiring, the overcurrent protection may be activated improperly or
the devices connected to the output side may misoperate or become faulty under
the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacitance of the wiring.
Therefore, the maximum overall wiring length should be as indicated in the following
table. If the wiring length exceeds the value, it is recommended to set "1" in Pr. 156
to make the fast-response current limit function invalid. (When two or more motors
are connected to the inverter, the total wiring length should be within the indicated
value.)
Inverter Capacity
Non-low acoustic
noise mode
Low acoustic noise
mode
200V class
400V class
200V class
400V class
0.4K
0.75K
1.5K
2.2K
300m
200m
200m
30m
500m
200m
300m
100m
500m
300m
500m
200m
500m
500m
500m
300m
Overall wiring length (3.7K or more)
500m maximum
300m
300m
300m + 300m = 600m
17
3.7K or
more
500m
500m
500m
500m
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
6) Connect only the recommended optional brake resistor between the + - PR.
These terminals must not be shorted.
7) Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes harmonic components, which
may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the
inverter. In this case, install the FR-BIF optional radio noise filter (for use in the input
side only) or FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF line noise filter to minimize interference.
8) Do not install a power capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter (FR-BIF
option) in the output side of the inverter.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be
damaged. If any of the above devices are installed, immediately remove them.
(When using the FR-BIF radio noise filter with a single-phase power supply, connect
it to the input side of the inverter after isolating the T phase securely.)
9) When rewiring after operation, make sure that the POWER lamp has gone off, and
when more than 10 minutes has elapsed after power-off, check with a meter etc.
that the voltage is zero. After that, start rewiring work. For some time after power-off,
there is a dangerous voltage in the capacitor.
Notes on Earthing (Grounding)
• Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter
and motor must be earthed (grounded).
• Use the dedicated earth (ground) terminal to earth (ground) the inverter. (Do not
use the screw in the case, chassis, etc.) For the earth connection avoid direct
contact between aluminium and copper. Tin-plated cable lugs can be used if the
plating does not contain zinc. When tightening the screws take care not to
damage the thread in the aluminium frame.
• The earth (ground) cable should be as thick as possible. Use the cable whose
gauge is equal to or larger than those indicated in the following table, and make
its length as short as possible. The earthing (grounding) point should be as near
as possible to the inverter to minimize the earth (ground) cable length.
(Unit: mm2)
Motor Capacity
2.2kW or less
3.7kW
5.5kW, 7.5kW
Earth Cable Gauge
200V class
400V class
2 (2.5)
2 (2.5)

2 (4)

3.5 (6)
To meet the Low Voltage Directive, use PVC insulated cables larger than specified
size in brackets ( ).
• Earth (Ground) the motor on the inverter side using one wire of the 4-core cable.
18
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(2) Terminal block layout of the power circuit
FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K-EC
L1
−
P1
+
PR
L2
L3
U
V
FR-E520S-0.4K to 2.2K-EC
−
W
L1
N
P1
+
PR
U
V
TB1
Screw size (M4)
W
TB1
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M4)
(3) Cables, crimping terminals, etc.
The following table lists the cables and crimping terminals used with the inputs (L1,L2,
L3) and outputs (U, V, W) of the inverter and the torques for tightening the screws:
1) FR-E540-0.4K to 7.5K-EC
PVC Insulated
TightCables
Crimping
Applicable Terminal
Cables
ening
Terminals
Screw
Inverter
2
2
Torque
mm
AWG
mm
Size
Type
N⋅⋅m L1, L2, L3 U, V, W L1, L2, L3 U, V, W L1, L2, L3 U, V, W L1, L2, L3 U, V, W
FR-E540M4
1.5
2-4
2-4
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
0.4K-EC
FR-E540M4
1.5
2-4
2-4
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
0.75K-EC
FR-E540M4
1.5
2-4
2-4
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
1.5K-EC
FR-E540M4
1.5
2-4
2-4
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
2.2K-EC
FR-E540M4
1.5
2-4
2-4
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
3.7K-EC
FR-E540M4
1.5
5.5-4
2-4
3.5
2
12
14
4
2.5
5.5K-EC
FR-E540M4
1.5
5.5-4
5.5-4
3.5
3.5
12
12
4
4
7.5K-EC
19
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2) FR-E520S-0.4K to 2.2K-EC
TightApplicable Terminal
ening
Screw
Inverter
Torque
Size
Type
N⋅⋅m
FR-E520S0.4K-EC
FR-E520S0.75K-EC
FR-E520S1.5K-EC
FR-E520S2.2K-EC
Crimping
Terminals
L1, N
U, V, W
Cables
2
mm
L1, N U, V, W
AWG
L1, N U, V, W
PVC Insulated
Cables
2
mm
L1, N U, V, W
M4
1.5
2-3.5
2-3.5
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
M4
1.5
2-4
2-4
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
M4
1.5
2-4
2-4
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
M4
1.5
5.5-4
2-4
3.5
2
12
14
4
2.5
Note: 1. The cables used should be 75°C copper cables.
2. Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torques.
Undertightening can cause a short or misoperation.
Overtightening can cause the screws and unit to be damaged, resulting in a
short or misoperation.
2
20
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(4) Connection of the power supply and motor
" Three-phase power input
L1
Three-phase
power supply 400V
L2
L1
U
L3
L2
V
U
L3
W
V
W
Earth(Ground)
terminal
Motor
Earth
(Ground)
No-fuse
breaker
The power supply cables must be connected
to L1, L2 ,L3. If they are connected to U, V, W,
the inverter will be damaged.
(Phase sequence need not be matched.)
Connect the motor to U, V, W. In the above
connection, turning on the forward rotation switch (signal)
rotates the motor in the counterclockwise (arrow) direction
when viewed from the load shaft.
" Single-phase power input
Single-phase power
supply 200V
L1
N
L1
U
N
V
U
W
V
W
Earth(Ground)
terminal
Motor
Earth
(Ground)
No-fuse
breaker
Note: 1. To ensure safety, connect the power input to the inverter via a
magnetic contactor and earth leakage circuit breaker or no-fuse
breaker, and use the magnetic contactor to switch power on-off.
2. The output is three-phase 200V.
21
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.2.3 Wiring of the control circuit
(1) Wiring instructions
1) Terminals PC, SE and 5 (and SD when sink logic is selected) are common to the I/O
signals. These common terminals must not be earthed to the ground.
2) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run
them away from the main and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence
circuit).
3) The frequency input signals to the control circuit are micro currents. When contacts
are required, use two or more parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact to
prevent a contact fault.
4) It is recommended to use the cables of 0.3mm2 to 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to
the control circuit terminals.
5) When bar terminals and solid wires are used for wiring, their diameters should be
0.9mm maximum If they are larger, screw threads may be damaged during
tightening.
(2) Terminal block layout
In the control circuit of the inverter, the terminals are arranged as shown below:
Terminal screw size: M2.5
Terminal layout of control circuit
RH
RM
RL
MRS
RES
SD
AM
PC
SE
RUN
FU
A
B
C
10
2
5
4
SD
STF
STR
SD
2
(3) Wiring method
1) For wiring the control circuit, use cables after stripping their sheaths.
Refer to the gauge printed on the inverter and strip the sheaths to the following
dimensions. If the sheath is stripped too much, its cable may be shorted with the
adjoining cable. If the sheath is stripped too little, the cable may come off.
7mm±1mm
22
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2) When using bar terminals and solid wires for wiring, their diameters should be
0.9mm maximum. If they are larger, the threads may be damaged during tightening.
3) Loosen the terminal screw and insert the cable into the terminal.
4) Tighten the screw to the specified torque.
Undertightening can cause cable disconnection or misoperation. Overtightening can
cause damage to the screw or unit, leading to short circuit or misoperation.
Tightening torque: 0.25 N⋅m to 0.49 N⋅m
* Use a size 0 screwdriver.
Note:
When routing the stripped cables, twist them so that they do not become loose.
In addition, do not solder them.
(4) Control logic changing
The input signal logic is factory-set to the source mode.
To change the control logic, the position of the connector beside the control circuit
terminal block must be changed.
1) Use tweezers etc. to remove the connector in the source logic position and fit it in
the sink logic position.
Do this position changing before switching power on.
Note: 1. Make sure that the front cover has been installed securely.
2. The front cover has a capacity plate and the inverter a rating plate on it.
Since these plates have the same serial numbers, always reinstall the
removed cover to the inverter from where it was removed.
3. Always install the sink-source logic changing connector in either of the
positions. If two connectors are installed in these positions at the same time,
the inverter may be damaged.
23
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2) Source logic type
• In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal
input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE common to the
open collector output signals.
• Current flow related to
RUN signal
Inverter
PC
Current
AX80
1
RUN
STF
R
R
R
SE
STR
24VDC
9
R
• When using an external power supply for transistor output, use terminal SD as a
common to prevent misoperation caused by undesirable current.
Inverter
AY-80
PC
1
STF
2
STR
24VDC
9
10
24VDC
(SD)
2
SD
3) Sink logic type
• In this logic, a signal switches on when a current flows out of the corresponding
signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE common to the
open collector output signals.
Current
R
• Current flow related
to RUN signal
Inverter
AX40
STF
1
RUN
R
R
R
STR
SD
SE
9
24VDC
24
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
• When using an external power supply for transistor output, use terminal PC as a
common to prevent misoperation caused by undesirable current.
(Do not connect terminal SD of the inverter with terminal 0V of the external power
supply. When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power supply, do not install the
power supply in parallel outside the inverter. Doing so may cause misoperation due
to undesirable current.)
AY40 type
transistor
output module
Inverter
1
STF
24VDC
(SD)
2
STR
3
RH
4
RM
5
RL
6
RES
9
10
PC
24VDC
SD
(5) How to use the STOP signal
The following connection example shows how to self-hold the start signals (forward
rotation, reverse rotation).
Use Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection) to assign the STOP signal.
Stop
RL
(STOP)
MRS
RES
SD
AM
PC
Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation
STF
STR
(Wiring example for source logic)
25
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.2.4 Connection to the PU connector
(1) When connecting the control panel or parameter unit using a cable
Use the option FR-CB2# or the following connector and commercially available cable:
<Connection cable>
! Connector : RJ45 connector
Example: 5-554720-3, Tyco Electronics Corporation
! Cable
: Cable conforming to EIA568 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable)
Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm×4P (Twisted pair cable, 4 pairs),
MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, LTD.
<When using the control panel>
Note:
The rear cover and junction adaptor are required since the circuit board is
exposed in the back of the control panel.
Use the FR-E5P option (cover and adaptor available as a set).
<Maximum wiring length>
! Control panel (FR-PA02-02): 20m
! Parameter unit (FR-PU04): 20m
(2) For RS-485 communication
The PU connector can be used for communication
operation from a personal computer etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a
personal, FA or other computer by a
communication cable, a user program allows the
inverter to be run and monitored and the parameter
values to be read and written.
1) SG
2) P5S
3) RDA
4) SDB
5) SDA
6) RDB
7) SG
8) P5S
8) to 1)
<PU connector pin-outs>
Viewed from the inverter (receptacle side) front
Note: 1. Do not connect the PU connector to a computer's LAN board, FAX modem
socket or telephone modular connector. Otherwise, the product may be
damaged due to electrical specification differences.
2. Pins 2) and 8) (P5S) provide power to the control panel or parameter unit.
Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
3. Refer to page 117 for the communication parameters.
26
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
<System configuration examples>
1) When a computer having a RS-485 interface is used with several inverters
Computer
RS-485
interface/terminal
Computer
Station 1
Station 2
Station n
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
PU connector
(Note1)
PU connector
(Note1)
PU connector
(Note1)
Distribution
terminal
Termination
resistor
10BASE-T cable (Note 2)
Use the connectors and cables which are available on the market.
Note: 1. Connector: RJ45 connector
Example: 5-554720-3, Tyco Electronics Corporation
2. Cable
: Cable conforming to EIA568 (such as 10BASE-T cable)
Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm × 4P (Twisted pair cable, 4 pairs),
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
(Do not use pins 2) and 8) (P5S).)
2) When a computer having a RS-232C interface is used with inverters
Computer
RS-232C
connector
RS-232C
cable
RS-485
terminal
Station 1
Max. 15m
Station 2
Station n
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
PU connector
(Note1)
PU connector
(Note1)
PU connector
(Note1)
Converter*
Distribution
terminal
Termination
resistor
10BASE-T cable (Note 2)
*Commercially available converter is required. (Note 3)
Use the connectors, cables and converter which are available on the
market.
Note: 1. Connector: RJ45 connector
Example: 5-554720-3, Tyco Electronics Corporation
2. Cable
: Cable conforming to EIA568 (such as 10BASE-T cable)
Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm × 4P (Twisted pair cable, 4 pairs),
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
(Do not use pins 2) and 8) (P5S).)
3.*Commercially available converter examples
Model: FA-T-RS40
Converter
Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
27
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
<Wiring methods>
1) Wiring of one RS-485 computer and one inverter
Cable connection and signal direction
Computer Side Terminals
Signal name
Description
RDA
Receive data
Receive data
RDB
Send data
SDA
SDB
Send data
Request to send
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
FG
Inverter
PU connector
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
10 BASE-T Cable
Request to send
Clear to send
Clear to send
Signal ground
Frame ground
(Note 1)
0.3mm2 or more
SG
2) Wiring of one RS-485 computer and "n" inverters (several inverters)
Cable connection and signal direction
10 BASE-T Cable
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
(Note 1)
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
Termination
resistor
(Note 2)
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
Computer
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
FG
SG
Station 1
SG
Station 2
SG
Station n
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Note: 1. Make connections in accordance with the instruction manual of the
computer used.
Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer as they differ between
models.
2. There may be the influence of reflection depending on the transmission
speed and/or transmission distance. If this reflection hinders
communication, provide a termination resistor. If the PU connector is used
to make a connection, use the distributor as a termination resistor cannot be
fitted.
Connect the termination resistor to only the inverter remotest from the
computer. (Termination resistor: 100Ω)
28
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units
The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.
Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or an accident. Connect and operate
the option unit carefully in accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.
(1) Connection of the dedicated external brake resistor (option)
Connect a brake resistor across terminals + and PR. Connect a dedicated brake
resistor only.
(For the positions of terminals + and PR, refer to the terminal block layout (page 19).)
P1
+ PR
Brake resistor
(2) Connection of the BU brake unit (option)
Connect the BU brake unit correctly
as shown on the right. Incorrect
connection will damage the inverter.
NFB
MC
Inverter
U
L1
V
L2
W
L3
Motor
IM
Remove jumpers.
−
+
Discharge resistor
T(Note 3)
P
HA HB HC TB
PC
OCR
Constantvoltage
power
supply
PR
OCR
−
+
N
BU brake unit
Brake unit
HC HB
OFF
Comparator
ON
MC
MC
Note: 1. The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and discharge resistor
should be within 2m. If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within
5m.
2. If the transistors in the brake unit should fail, the resistor will be extremely
hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a magnetic contactor on the inverter's
power supply side to shut off current in case of failure.
3. When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
29
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(3) Connection of the FR-HC high power factor converter (option unit)
(In the case of single-phase power input, the FR-HC cannot be connected.)
When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to suppress power
harmonics, wire as shown below. Wrong connection will damage the high power factor
converter and inverter.
High power
factor converter
(FR-HC)
External box
(FR-HCB)
Reactor 1
(FR-HCL01)
NFB MC
Power
supply
R R2
S S2
T T2
Resistor
R2
S2
T2
MC1
MC2
MC1
Inverter
(FR-E500)
L1
L2
L3
MC2
Reactor 2
(FR-HCL02)
R3
MC
S3
T3
Filter
capacitor
R3 R4
S3 S4
T3 T4
Resistor
R4
S4
T4
P
N
RDY
RSO
SE
R
S Phase
T detection
Motor
+
−
MRS
RES
SD
U
V
W
IM
Note: 1. The power input terminals L1, L2, L3 must be open.
Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Reverse polarity of terminals
−, + will damage the inverter.
2. The voltage phases of terminals L1, L2, L3 and terminals R4, S4, T4 must be
matched before connection.
3. If the load capacity is less than half of the high power factor converter
capacity, satisfactory harmonic suppression effects cannot be produced.
(4) Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (option)
Connect the FR-BEL power factor improving DC
reactor between terminals P1-+. In this case, the
jumper connected across terminals P1-+ must be
removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not function.
<Connection method>
−
P1
+ PR
FR-BEL
Remove the jumper.
Note: 1. The wiring distance should be within 5m.
2. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the
power supply cables (L1, L2, L3).
30
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.2.6 Design information
1) Provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2 which are used for
commercial power supply-inverter switch-over.
When there is a commercial power supply-inverter switch-over circuit as shown
below, the inverter will be damaged by leakage current from the power supply due to
arcs generated at the time of switch-over or chattering caused by a sequence error.
2) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure,
provide a magnetic contactor in the inverter's primary circuit and also make up a
sequence which will not switch on the start signal.
If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will
automatically restart as soon as the power is restored.
3) Since the input signals to the control circuit are on a low level, use two or more
parallel micro signal contacts or a twin contact for contact inputs to prevent a contact
fault.
4) Do not apply a large voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control
circuit.
5) Always apply a voltage to the alarm output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp
etc.
6) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
3) Low-level signal contacts
1) Commercial power supply-inverter
switch-over
MC1
Power
supply
Interlock
U
IM
V
MC2
W Leakage current
Inverter
L1
L2
L3
Low-level signal contacts
31
Twin contact
2.3 Other Wiring
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3 Other wiring
2.3.1 Power supply harmonics
Power supply harmonics may be generated from the converter section of the inverter,
affecting the power supply equipment, power capacitor, etc. Power supply harmonics
are different in generation source, frequency band and transmission path from radio
frequency (RF) noise and leakage currents. Take the following counter measures.
" The differences between harmonics and RF noises are indicated below:
Item
Harmonics
Normally 40th to 50th
Frequency
degrees or less (up to 3kHz
or less)
To wire paths, power
Environment
impedance
Quantitative
Logical computation is
understanding
possible
Approximately proportional
Generated amount
to load capacity
Immunity of affected Specified in standards for
device
each device.
Examples of
Install a reactor.
safeguard
RF Noise
High frequency (several 10kHz to 1GHz
order)
Across spaces, distance, laying paths
Occurs randomly, quantitative
understanding is difficult.
According to current fluctuation rate
(larger with faster switching)
Differs according to maker's device
specifications.
Increase the distance.
" Countermeasures
Note:
2
Power factor
improving DC
reactor
NFB
Inverter
The harmonic current generated from the
inverter to the power supply differs
according to various conditions such as the
wiring impedance, whether a power factor
improving reactor is used or not, and output
frequency and output current on load side.
For the output frequency and output current,
the adequate method is to obtain them
under rated load at the maximum operating
frequency.
Power factor
improving AC
reactor
Motor
IM
Do not insert power
factor improving capacitor
A power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter's
output side may overheat or be damaged due to the harmonics of the inverter
output. Also, when an overcurrent flows in the inverter, the overcurrent
protection is activated. Hence, when the motor is driven by the inverter, do
not install a capacitor or surge suppressor on the inverter's output side. To
improve the power factor, insert a power factor improving reactor in the
inverter's input or DC circuit. For details, refer to the FR-A500/E500 series
technical information.
32
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.2 Inverter-generated noise and reduction techniques
Some noises enter the inverter causing it to incorrectly operate, and others are
radiated by the inverter causing misoperation of peripheral devices. Though the
inverter is designed to be insusceptible to noise, it handles low-level signals, so it
requires the following basic measures to be taken. Also, since the inverter chops the
output at high carrier frequencies, it could generate noise. If these noises cause
peripheral devices to misoperate, measures should be taken to suppress noise. The
measures differ slightly depending on noise propagation paths.
1) Basic measures
! Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in
parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
! Use twisted shield cables for the detector connecting and control signal cables
and connect the sheathes of the shield cables to terminal SD.
! Earth (Ground) the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.
2) Measures against noise which enters and causes misoperation of the inverter
When devices which generate noise (devices which use magnetic contactors,
magnetic brakes, many relays, for example) are installed near the inverter, the
inverter may misoperate due to noise. The following measures must be taken:
! Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate noise to suppress noise.
! Fit data line filters (Refer to page 36) to signal cables.
! Ground the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable
clamp metal.
33
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
3) Measures against noises which are radiated by the inverter causing misoperation of
peripheral devices.
Inverter-generated noises are largely classified into those radiated by the cables
connected to the inverter and inverter main circuit (I/O), those electromagnetically
and electrostatically inducted to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to
the main circuit power supply, and those transmitted through the power supply
cables.
Inverter-generated
noise
Air-propagated
noise
Noise directly radiated by
inverter
$$$Path 1)
Noise radiated by power
cables
$$$Path 2)
Noise radiated by motor
cables
$$$Path 3)
Magnetic induc$$$Path 4), 5)
tion noise
Static induction
$$$Path 6)
noise
Noise propagated through
power cables
Cable Propagated noise
$$$Path 7)
Leakage noise from ground
$$$Path 8)
cable due to leakage current
2
Telephone
5)
7)
1)
Receiver
3)
Sensor power
supply
7)
2)
Inve6)
rter
2)
4)
Instrument
Motor IM
34
8)
Sensor
3)
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Noise Path
1), 2), 3)
4), 5), 6)
7)
8)
Measures
When devices which handle low-level signals and are susceptible to
misoperation due to noise (such as instruments, receivers and sensors)
are installed near the inverter and their signal cables are contained in the
same panel as the inverter or are run near the inverter, the devices may
be misoperated by air-propagated noise and the following measures must
be taken:
(1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the
inverter.
(2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the
inverter.
(3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in
parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
(4) Insert line noise filters onto I/O and radio noise filters into inputs to
suppress cable-radiated noises.
(5) Use shielded cables for signal cables and power cables and run them
in individual metal conduits to further reduce effects.
When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power
cables, magnetic and static induction noises may be propagated to the
signal cables causing misoperation of the devices and the following
measures must be taken:
(1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the
inverter.
(2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the
inverter.
(3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in
parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
(4) Use shielded cables for signal cables and power cables and run them
in individual metal conduits to further reduce effects.
When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to the
power supply of the inverter within the same line, inverter-generated noise
may flow back through the power supply cables causing misoperation of
the devices and the following measures must be taken:
(1) Install the radio noise filter (FR-BIF) to the power cables (input cables)
of the inverter.
(2) Install the line noise filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01) to the power cables
(I/O cables) of the inverter.
When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral device
wiring to the inverter, leakage current may flow through the ground cable
of the inverter causing misoperation of the device. In such a case,
disconnection of the ground cable of the device may cause the device to
operate properly.
35
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
" Data line filter
Noise entry can be prevented by providing a data line filter for the detector or other
cable.
" Example of counter measures against noise
FR-BLF
Install filter
FR-BSF01
to inverter input side.
Control box Reduce carrier frequency.
Inverter
power supply
Install filter FR-BIF to
inverter input side.
Separate inverter and power
line 30cm or more (at least 10cm)
from sensor circuit.
Control power
supply
Do not ground control
box directly.
Do not ground control cable.
FRBSF01
Inverter
FRBSF01
FR-BLF
to
FR-BSF01
inverter output side.
Motor
Install filter
IM
Use 4-core cable for motor power
cable and use one wire as earth cable.
FRBIF
Use twisted pair shielded cable.
Sensor
Power supply
for sensor
Do not ground shield but connect it to signal
common cable.
! By decreasing the carrier frequency, the noise terminal voltage* can be reduced.
Use Pr. 72 to set the carrier frequency to a low value (1kHz).
Though motor noise increases at a low carrier frequency, selection of Soft-PWM
will make it unoffending.
! By using shielded cables as signal cables, induction noise can be reduced greatly
(1/10 to 1/100).
* Noise terminal voltage: Represents the magnitude of noise propagated from the
inverter to the power supply.
36
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.3 Leakage currents and countermeasures
Due to the static capacitance existing in the inverter I/O wiring and motor, leakage
currents flow through them. Since their values depend on the static capacitance, carrier
frequency, etc., take the following measures.
(1) To-earth (ground) leakage currents
Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the other
lines through the earth (ground) cable, etc. These leakage currents may operate earth
leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily.
" Countermeasures
! If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the carrier frequency (Pr. 72) of
the inverter.
Note that motor noise increases. Selection of Soft-PWM (Pr. 240) will make it
unoffending.
! By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge
suppression (e.g. Mitsubishi's Progressive Super Series) in the inverter's own line
and other line, operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high
(with low noise).
" To-earth (ground) leakage current
! Note that a long wiring length will increase leakage currents. Decrease the carrier
frequency of the inverter to reduce leakage currents.
! Higher motor capacity leads to larger leakage currents. The leakage currents of
the 400V class are higher than those of the 200V class.
(2) Line-to-line leakage currents
Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacities between the inverter output
cables may operate the external thermal relay unnecessarily.
NFB
Power
supply
Thermal relay
Motor
IM
Inverter
Line static capacitances
Line-to-line leakage current path
37
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
" Countermeasures
! Use the electronic overcurrent protection of the inverter.
! Decrease the carrier frequency. Note that motor noise increases. Selection of
Soft-PWM will make it unoffending.
To ensure that the motor is protected not to be influenced by line-to-line leakage
currents, we recommend the protection method which uses a temperature sensor
to directly detect motor temperature.
2.3.4 Inverter-driven 400V class motor
In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated
at the motor terminals. Especially for a 400V class motor, the surge voltage may
deteriorate the insulation. When the 400V class motor is driven by the inverter,
consider the following measures:
" Measures
It is recommended to take either of the following measures:
(1) Rectifying the motor insulation
For the 400V class motor, use an insulation-rectified motor. Specifically
1) Specify the "400V class inverter-driven, insulation-rectified motor".
2) For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and
low-vibration motor, use the "inverter-driven, dedicated motor".
(2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side
On the secondary side of the inverter, connect the optional surge voltage
suppression filter (FR-ASF-H).
38
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.5 Peripheral devices
(1) Selection of peripheral devices
Check the capacity of the motor to be used with the inverter you purchased.
Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity.
Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
Motor
Inverter Type
Output
Single-phase
200V
Three-phase 400V
(kW)
Power
Supply
Capacity
(kVA)
Rated current of Circuit Breaker (Note 5)
With power factor
Standard
improving reactor
Magnetic Contactor
(MC)
A
B
FR-E540-0.4K-EC
0.4
1.5
30AF 5A
30AF 5A
S-N10
FR-E540-0.75K-EC
0.75
2.5
30AF 5A
30AF 5A
S-N10
FR-E540-1.5K-EC
1.5
4.5
30AF 10A
30AF 10A
S-N10
FR-E540-2.2K-EC
2.2
5.5
30AF 15A
30AF 10A
S-N20
FR-E540-3.7K-EC
3.7
9
30AF 20A
30AF 15A
S-N20
FR-E540-5.5K-EC
5.5
12
30AF 30A
30AF 20A
S-N20
FR-E540-7.5K-EC
7.5
17
30AF 30A
30AF 30A
S-N20
FR-E520S-0.4K-EC
0.4
1.5
30AF 10A
30AF 10A
S-N10
FR-E520S-0.75K-EC 0.75
2.5
30AF 15A
30AF 15A
S-N10
FR-E520S-1.5K-EC
1.5
4.5
30AF 20A
30AF 20A
S-N21
FR-E520S-2.2K-EC
2.2
5.5
30AF 30A
30AF 30A
S-N25
C
Power supply capacity(kVA)
Note: 1. Select the type of the no-fuse breaker
(NFB) in response to the power
Power factor
supply capacity.
improving
2. The power supply cable size of the
AC reactor
range
motor indicated assumes that its
500
B
A
length is 20m.
C
3. The inverter input side magnetic
50
contactor to be chosen differs
0
10
20 Wiring length(m)
between the applicable ranges A, B
and C shown on the right, depending
Note: Power supply used has the above
recommended size.
on the power supply capacity and
wiring length.
4. When the inverter capacity is greater than the motor capacity, choose the
breaker and magnetic contactor in accordance with the inverter type and
choose the cables and power factor improving reactor in accordance with
the motor output.
5. For installations in the United States or Canada, the circuit breaker must be
inverse time or instantaneous trip type.
39
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
" Installation and selection of no-fuse breaker
Install a no-fuse breaker (NFB) in the power supply side for protection of the
inverter's primary wiring. Refer to the previous table and choose the NFB according
to the inverter's power supply side power factor (which changes with the power
supply voltage, output frequency and load). Especially for a completely
electromagnetic type NFB, the one with a larger capacity must be selected since its
operational characteristics change with harmonic currents. (Check the data of the
corresponding breaker for confirmation.) Also the earth leakage circuit breaker used
should be our product durable against harmonics/surges (such as the Progressive
Super Series).
" Power factor improving reactor
SingleThree-phase 400V
phase 200V
Inverter Model
Note:
FR-E540-0.4K-EC
FR-E540-0.75K-EC
FR-E540-1.5K-EC
FR-E540-2.2K-EC
FR-E540-3.7K-EC
FR-E540-5.5K-EC
FR-E540-7.5K-EC
FR-E520S-0.4K-EC
FR-E520S-0.75K-EC
FR-E520S-1.5K-EC
FR-E520S-2.2K-EC
Power Factor Improving
AC Reactor
FR-BAL-H0.4K
FR-BAL-H0.75K
FR-BAL-H1.5K
FR-BAL-H2.2K
FR-BAL-H3.7K
FR-BAL-H5.5K
FR-BAL-H7.5K
FR-BAL-0.75K (Note)
FR-BAL-1.5K (Note)
FR-BAL-2.2K (Note)
FR-BAL-3.7K (Note)
Power Factor Improving
DC Reactor
FR-BEL-H0.4K
FR-BEL-H0.75K
FR-BEL-H1.5K
FR-BEL-H2.2K
FR-BEL-H3.7K
FR-BEL-H5.5K
FR-BEL-H7.5K
FR-BEL-0.75K (Note)
FR-BEL-1.5K (Note)
FR-BEL-2.2K (Note)
FR-BEL-3.7K (Note)
The power factor may be slightly lower.
When the inverter is connected near a
large-capacity power supply transformer
(500kVA or more, wiring length 10m
maximum) or there is power capacitor
switch-over, excessive peak currents may
flow into the power input circuit and
damage the converter circuit. In such a
case, the power supply improving reactor
(FR-BEL or FR-BAL) must be installed.
NFB
Power
supply
Inverter
R
X
L1
S
Y
T
Z
V
L2
W
L3
+ P1
U
FR-BEL
Power
factor
improving
reactor
range
1500
Power
supply 1000
capacity
(kVA) 500
0
40
FR-BAL
10 Wiring length(m)
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(2) Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit
breaker
When using the earth leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated
sensitivity current as follows, independently of the PWM carrier frequency:
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
2 3.5
5.5
Leakage current example of 3-phase
induction motor during commercial
power supply operation (200V 60Hz)
Leakage current(mA)
Leakage current(mA)
Example of leakage current per 1km in
cable path during commercial power
supply operation when the CV cable is
routed in metal conduit
(200V 60Hz)
8 14 22 38 80 150
30 60 100
2.0
1.0
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
Cable size (mm2)
1.5
3.7 7.5 15 22 37 55
2.2
5.5 11 18.5 30 45
Motor capacity (kW)
! Progressive Super Series (Type SP, CF, SF, CP)
Rated sensitivity current: I∆n ≥ 10×(lg1+Ign+lg2+lgm)
! Conventional NV series (Type CA, CS, SS produced prior to '91)
Rated sensitivity current: I∆n ≥ 10×{lg1+lgn+3×(lg2+lgm)}
lg1, lg2 : Leakage currents of cable path during commercial power supply operation
lgn*
: Leakage current of noise filter on inverter input side
lgm
: Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply operation
<Example>
5.5mm2 × 5m 5.5mm2 × 70m
NV Noise filter
Inverter
IM
Ig1 Ign
Ig2
3φ
200V 2.2kW
Igm
Note: 1. The earth leakage circuit breaker should be installed to the primary (power
supply) side of the inverter.
2. Ground fault in the secondary side of the inverter can be detected at the
running frequency of 120Hz or lower.
3. In the
connection neutral point grounded system, the sensitivity current
becomes worse for ground faults in the inverter secondary side. Hence, the
protective grounding of the load equipment should be 10Ω or less.
4. When the breaker is installed in the secondary side of the inverter, it may be
unnecessarily operated by harmonics if the effective value is less than the
rating. In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and
hysteresis loss increase and the temperature rises.
* Note the leakage current value of the noise filter installed on the inverter input
side.
41
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Progressive Super Series
Conventional NV
(Type SP, CF, SF,CP)
(Type CA, CS, SS)
5m
Leakage current (Ig1) (mA)
33 ×
= 0.17
1000m
Leakage current (Ign) (mA)
0 (without noise filter)
70m
Leakage current (Ig2) (mA)
33 ×
= 2.31
1000m
Motor leakage
0.18
current (Igm) (mA)
Total leakage current (mA)
2.66
7.64
Rated sensitivity current
30
100
(mA) ( ≥ Ig × 10)
2
42
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.6 Instructions for compliance with U.S. and
Canadian Electrical Codes
(Standard to comply with: UL 508C)
(1) Short circuit ratings
Suitable For Use In A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than 5 kA rms
Symmetrical Amperes.
(2) Branch circuit protection
For installation in United States, branch circuit protection must be provided, in
accordance with the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes.
For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance
with the Canada Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.
(3) Wiring of the power supply and motor
Use the UL-listed cables (rated at 75°C) and round crimping terminals to wire the input
(L1, L2, L3) and output (U, V, W) terminals of the inverter. Crimp the terminals with the
crimping tool recommended by the terminal manufacturer.
(4) Motor overload protection
When using the electronic overcurrent protection function as motor overload protection,
set the rated motor current in Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay.
When connecting two or more motors to the inverter, install external thermal relays for
individual motors.
Reference: Motor overload protection characteristics
Operation time (s)
50% setting 100% setting
(Note 1, 2) (Note 2)
Protection activating range
Range on the right of characteristic curve
Normal operating range
Range on the left of characteristic curve
30Hz or higher
(Note 3)
20Hz
10Hz
(Note 1) When you set the 50% value (current
240
180
value) of the rated inverter output current.
Electronic overcurrent (Note 2) The % value denotes the percentage of
protection for transistor
the current value to the rated inverter
protection
120
60
0
50
100
150 180200
Inverter output current (%)
(% to rated inverter output current)
output current, not to the rated motor current.
(Note 3) This characteristic curve will be described
even under operation of 6Hz or higher
when you set the electronic overcurrent
protection dedicated to the Mitsubishi
constant-torque motor.
43
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.3.7 Instructions for compliance with the European standards
(The products conforming to the Low Voltage Directive carry the CE mark.)
(1) EMC Directive
1) Our view of transistorized inverters for the EMC Directive
A transistorized inverter is a component designed for installation in a control box
and for use with the other equipment to control the equipment/device.
Therefore, we understand that the EMC Directive does not apply directly to
transistorized inverters. For this reason, we do not place the CE mark on the
transistorized inverters. (The CE mark is placed on inverters in accordance with
the Low Voltage Directive.) The European power drive manufacturers'
organization (CEMEP) also holds this point of view.
2) Compliance
We understand that the transistorized inverters are not covered directly by the
EMC Directive. However, the EMC Directive applies to machines/equipment into
which transistorized inverters have been incorporated, and these machines and
equipment must carry the CE marks. Hence, we prepared the technical
information "EMC Installation Guidelines" (information number BCN-A21041202) so that machines and equipment incorporating transistorized inverters may
conform to the EMC Directive more easily.
2
3) Outline of installation method
Install an inverter using the following methods:
* Use the inverter with an European Standard-compliant noise filter.
* For wiring between the inverter and motor, use shielded cables or run them in
a metal piping and ground the cables on the inverter and motor sides with the
shortest possible distance.
* Insert a line noise filter and ferrite core into the power and control lines as
required.
Full information including the European Standard-compliant noise filter
specifications are written in the technical information "EMC Installation
Guidelines" (BCN-A21041-202). Please contact your sales representative.
44
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(2) Low Voltage Directive
1) Our view of transistorized inverters for the Low Voltage Directive
Transistorized inverters are covered by the Low Voltage Directive (Standard to
comply with: EN50178).
2) Compliance
We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the Low Voltage
Directive and place the CE mark on the inverters.
3) Outline of instructions
* In the 400V class inverters, the rated input voltage range is three-phase, 380V
to 415V, 50Hz/60Hz.
* Connect the equipment to the earth (ground) securely. Do not use an earth
leakage circuit breaker as an electric shock protector without connecting the
equipment to the earth (ground).
* Wire the earth terminal independently. (Do not connect two or more cables to
one terminal.)
* The wire size on pages 18 and 19 are shown for following conditions.
! Ambient Temp:
40°C maximum
! Wire installation: On wall without duct or conduits
If conditions are different from above, select appropriate wire according to
EN60204 ANNEX C TABLE 5.
* Use the no-fuse breaker and magnetic contactor which conform to the EN or
IEC Standard.
Design notice: Where residual-current-operated protective device (RCD) is
used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only
RCD of Type B is allowed on the supply side of this Electronic
Equipment (EE). Otherwise another protective measure shall
be applied such as separation of the EE from the environment
by double or reinforced insulation or isolation of EE and supply
system by a transformer. (Extract from EN51078)
* Use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category II and
contamination level 2 or higher specified in IEC664.
* On the input and output of the inverter, use cables of the type and size set
forth in EN60204 Appendix C.
* The operating capacity of the relay outputs (terminal symbols A, B, C) should
be 30VDC, 0.3A.
* The terminals indicated as the input and output terminals for control circuit on
page 13 are isolated safely from the main circuit.
Environment
During
During
In storage
operation
transportation
Ambient Temperature
-10°C to +50°C
-20°C to +65°C
-20°C to +65°C
Ambient Humidity
90% RH or less
90% RH or less
90% RH or less
Maximum Altitude
1,000 m
1,000 m
10,000 m
Details are given in the technical information "Low Voltage Directive
Conformance Guide" (BCN-A21041-203). Please contact your sales
representative.
45
CHAPTER 3
OPERATION/CONTROL
This chapter provides the basic "operation/control" for use
of this product.
Always read this chapter before using the equipment.
3.1 Pre-Operation Information ........................................ 46
3.2 About the Control Panel............................................ 49
Chapter 1
3.3 Operation.................................................................. 55
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
3.1 Pre-Operation Information
3 OPERATION/CONTROL
3.1 Pre-Operation Information
3.1.1 Types of operation modes
The inverter can be operated in any of "PU operation mode", "external operation
mode", "combined operation mode" and "communication operation mode". Prepare
required instruments and parts according to the operation mode. For the way of
changing the operation mode, refer to page 52.
(1) External operation mode
(factory setting, Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 0)
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" is factory-set to 0 and the
external operation mode is selected at power-on.
The inverter is operated using an external start signal and an
external frequency setting signal.
Preparation
! Start signal........................ Switch, relay, etc.
! Frequency setting signal ... 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA
DC signals or multiple speeds
from a potentiometer or outside
the inverter
Note: 1. Operation cannot be started by the start signal alone. Both the start signal
and frequency setting signal are required to run the inverter.
(2) PU operation mode (Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 1)
How to perform operation using the optional control
panel or parameter unit.
Preparation
! Operation unit ...............Control panel (FR-PA02-02) or parameter unit (FR-PU04)
! Connection cable ..........To be prepared for use of the control panel (FR-PA02-02)
away from the inverter or for use of the parameter unit (FRPU04).
FR-CB2%% (option)
! FR-E5P (option) ............To be prepared for use of the control panel away from the
inverter. It is available as a set of control panel cover and
connection cable junction adapter.
46
(3) Combined operation mode 1 (Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 3)
The start signal is an external signal.
The frequency setting signal is made setting using the optional
control panel or parameter unit.
Preparation
! Start signal..............Switch, relay, etc.
! Operation unit .........Control panel (FR-PA02-02) or
parameter unit (FR-PU04)
! Connection cable ....Refer to (1) PU operation mode.
! FR-E5P (option)......Refer to (1) PU operation mode.
(4) Combined operation mode 2 (Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 4)
The start signal is entered from the operation command key
of the optional control panel.
The frequency setting signal is set using the external
frequency setting signal.
Preparation
! Frequency.................0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC
setting signal
signals from an external
potentiometer or from outside the
inverter
! Operation unit ...........Control panel (FR-PA02-02) or
parameter unit (FR-PU04)
! Connection cable ......Refer to (1) PU operation mode.
! FR-E5P (option)........Refer to (1) PU operation mode.
3
47
(5) Communication operation mode
(Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = 0 or 1)
Communication operation can be performed by connecting a personal computer and
the PU connector with the RS-485 communication cable.
The inverter setup software is available as an FR-E500 inverter start-up support
software package.
Preparation
! Connection cable ........................ Connector: RJ45 connector
Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568
(e.g. 10BASE-T cable)
! Personal computer
! RS-485, RS-232C converter ....... To be prepared when the communication port of
the personal computer has RS-232C
specifications.
3.1.2 Power on
Before switching power on, check the following.
" Installation check
Make sure that the inverter is installed correctly in a proper location. (Refer to page
11.)
! Wiring check
Make sure that the main and control circuits are wired correctly.
Make sure that the options and peripheral devices are selected and connected
correctly. (Refer to page 13.)
" Switch power on
Power-on is complete if the POWER lamp is lit and the ALARM lamp is off.
48
3.2 About the Control Panel
3.2 About the Control Panel
With the optional control panel (FR-PA02-02), you can run the inverter, set the
frequency, monitor the operation command display, set parameters, and display an
error.
3.2.1 Names and functions of the control panel (FR-PA02-02)
Cover opened
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
Display
LED 4 digits
Setting key
Mode key
STOP
RUN
RESET
RUN key
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
MODE
FWD
STOP/RESET key Forward key
SET
Unit indication
Operation status
indication
Reverse keys
REV
STOP
RESET
STOP/RESET key Up/down keys
" Key indication
Key
key
MODE key
SET key
RUN
/
FWD
REV
key
key
key
STOP
RESET
key
Description
Used to give a start rotation command.
You can select the operation mode or setting mode.
You can determine the frequency and parameter setting.
Used to increase or decrease the running frequency
"
consecutively. Hold down this key to change the frequency.
Press this key in the setting mode to change the parameter
"
setting consecutively.
Used to give a forward rotation command.
Used to give a reverse rotation command.
Used to stop operation.
"
Used to reset the inverter when its output is stopped by the
"
activated protective function.
" Unit indications, operating status indications
Indication
Hz
A
RUN
MON
PU
EXT
Description
Lit to indicate the frequency.
Lit to indicate the current.
Lit while the inverter is operating. Lit to indicate forward rotation, and flickers to
indicate reverse rotation.
Lit in the monitor display mode.
Lit in the PU operation mode.
Lit in the external operation mode.
49
3
3.2.2 Control panel mode is changed by pressing the
"Monitoring mode
"Frequency setting
mode (Note)
Hz
MODE
key
"Parameter setting
mode
Hz
MON
MODE
PU
MODE
SET
FWD
REV
MODE
STOP
RESET
MODE
PU
SET
PU
REV
MODE
STOP
RESET
FWD
"Help mode
MODE
PU
SET
FWD
REV
STOP
RESET
"Operation mode
MODE
MODE
SET
FWD
REV
MODE
PU
MODE
STOP
RESET
FWD
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
(Note) The frequency setting mode is displayed only in the PU operation mode.
3.2.3 Monitoring
! Operation command indications given while a monitor display is being provided
EXT is lit to indicate external operation.
PU is lit to indicate PU operation.
Both EXT and PU are lit to indicate combined operation.
! The monitor display can also be changed during operation.
"Frequency monitor
"Current monitor "Voltage monitor "Alarm monitor
Hz
MON
PU EXT
MODE
SET
FWD
Alarm absent
SET
SET
REV
SET
MON
PU EXT
A MON
PU EXT
SET
STOP
RESET
*1
SET
SET
*1
Alarm present
SET
*1
SET
*2
MODE
To 3.2.4 Frequency setting mode (Note3)
Note: 1. Hold down the SET key marked *1 for more than 1.5 seconds to change the
current monitor to the power-on monitor.
2. Hold down the SET key marked *2 for more than 1.5 seconds to display four
errors including the most recent one.
3. To the parameter setting mode when in the external operation mode.
50
3.2.4 Frequency setting
Set the frequency value used for operation performed under the operation command
given by the RUN key ( FWD or REV key) in the PU operation mode.
This mode is displayed only in PU operation.
To frequency monitoring
"Frequency setting mode
"Set frequency changing "Set frequency
write
Hz
Hz
PU
PU
MODE
SET
FWD
REV
STOP
RESET
Change the set
frequency with
SET
MODE
Hz
PU
Flicker
Hz
PU
MODE
To 3.2.5 Parameter setting mode
3.2.5 Parameter setting method
With the exception of some parameters, parameter setting can be made only when the PU
operation mode is selected by the Pr. 79 setting.
! A parameter value may either be set by updating its parameter number or setting
the value digit-by-digit using the
key.
/
! To write the setting, change it and press the SET key for about 1.5 seconds.
Note: If parameter write cannot be performed, refer to page 174.
3
51
(1) Example: To change the Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" setting
from "2" (external operation mode) to "1" (PU operation mode)
(For details of Pr. 79, refer to page 106.)
Press the MODE key, to choose the
parameter setting mode.
"Parameter setting mode
Most significant
digit flickers
PU
MODE
SET
FWD
SET
REV
Least significant
Middle digit flickers digit flickers
SET
STOP
RESET
×9 times
or
×1 times
×7 times
or
×3 times
MODE
To 3.2.6 Operation mode
SET
0 to 9
0 to 9
"Current setting
"Setting change
SET
Press for
1.5s
SET
"Setting write
When
appears
1) If the RUN indication is lit or flickering,
stop operation by pressing the
RUN
STOP
RESET
key or turning off the forward rotation
(STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal
Flicker
connected to the control terminal.
2) You cannot set any value that is outside the
parameter setting range. Write a value within
the setting range.
"1" (PU operation mode) has been set in Pr. 79.
If the value and
do not flicker but
appears, you did not press the
SET
key
for 1.5 seconds when writing the value.
Press the
key once, press the
SET
restart the setting from the beginning.
52
key, and
3.2.6 Operation mode
The operation mode change method which is shown below is only allowed when Pr. 79
"operation mode selection" is "0".
"PU operation
"PU jog operation
"External operation
PU
PU
MODE
SET
FWD
EXT
REV
STOP
RESET
MODE
MODE
MODE
To 3.2.7 Help mode
Note: If the operation mode cannot be changed, refer to page 174.
3.2.7 Help mode
"Alarm history
"Alarm history
clear
"Parameter clear
PU EXT
MODE
SET
FWD
REV
STOP
RESET
"Software version
read
MODE
To 3.2.3 Monitoring mode
53
"All clear
3
(1) Alarm history
Four past alarms can be displayed with the
("." is appended to the most recent alarm.)
When no alarm exists, E._ _0 is displayed.
/
key.
"Most recent alarm
SET
SET
When alarm occurs
Hz
Frequency
Current
PU EXT
A
PU EXT
Voltage
Energization time
PU EXT
PU EXT
(2) Alarm history clear
Clears all alarm history.
Flicker
SET
SET
SET
Cancel
(3) Parameter clear
Initializes the parameter values to the factory settings. The calibration values are
not initialized.
(Parameter values are not cleared by setting "1" in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable
selection")
Flicker
SET
SET
SET
Cancel
Note: The Pr. 75, Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, and Pr. 901 to Pr. 905
values are not initialized.
(4) All clear
Initializes the parameter values and calibration values to the factory settings.
Flicker
SET
SET
SET
Cancel
Note: The Pr. 75 value is not initialized.
54
3.3 Operation
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Pre-operation checks
Before starting operation, check the following:
" Safety
Perform test operation after making sure that safety is ensured if the machine
should become out of control.
" Machine
Make sure that the machine is free of damage.
" Parameters
Set the parameter values to match the operating machine (system) environment.
" Test operation
Perform test operation and make sure that the machine operates safely under light
load at a low frequency. After that, start operation.
Since the Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM setting" value is factory-set to select Soft-PWM
control, the tone is different from that in the conventional non-low acoustic noise
mode, this is not a fault.
3
55
3.3.2 External operation mode (Operation using the external
frequency setting potentiometer and external start signal)
(1) Operation at 50Hz
Operation command: Externally connected start signal
Frequency setting: Externally connected frequency setting potentiometer
Step
1
Description
Power on → Operation mode check
With the factory setting, the external operation mode is
selected and the [EXT] indication is lit when power is
switched on. If the [EXT] indication is not lit, refer to page
51 and set "2" in Pr. 79.
Start
Set the start switch (STF or STR) to ON.
The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation, or
flickers to indicate reverse rotation.
2
3
4
Image
ON
RUN
A
PU EXT
Forward rotation
Reverse
rotation
Hz RUN
Note: The motor does not start if both the forward
and reverse rotation switches are turned on. If
both switches are turned on during operation,
the motor decelerates to a stop.
Acceleration → Constant speed
Slowly turn the potentiometer connected across terminals
2-5 (frequency setting potentiometer) fully clockwise.
The frequency shown on the display increases gradually to
50.00Hz.
Deceleration
Slowly turn the potentiometer connected across terminals
2-5 (frequency setting potentiometer) fully
counterclockwise.
The frequency shown on the display decreases gradually
to 0.00Hz.
The motor stops running.
Stop
Turn off the start switch (STF or STR).
A MON
PU EXT
External potentiometer
External potentiometer
Forward rotation
Reverse
rotation
Stop
5
OFF
<Reference> If other frequency is required at fully clockwise position, change Pr. 38
"Frequency at 5V (10V)" setting.
(Refer to page 86)
56
3.3.3 PU operation mode (Operation using the control panel)
(1) Using the control panel (FR-PA02- 02) for operation at 50Hz with
digital frequency setting
Operation command: RUN key or control panel (FR-PA02-02)
/
key
Frequency setting:
FWD
/
REV
key
Related parameters: Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
By repeating step 2 below during motor run, speed can be varied.
Step
1
Description
Power on → Operation mode check
Switch power on, refer to page 51, and set "1" in Pr. 79
"operation mode selection".
The [PU] indication is lit.
Image
ON
PU
2
3
4
Running frequency setting
Set the running frequency to 50Hz.
1) Refer to page 50 and select the frequency setting mode
with the MODE key.
/
2) Refer to page 51, change the setting with the
SET
key, and write the new setting with the
key.
Start
Press the RUN key (or FWD / REV key). The monitoring
mode is automatically selected and the output frequency is
displayed.
The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation, or
flickers to indicate reverse rotation.
Stop
STOP
Press the RESET
key.
The motor is decelerated to a stop.
The [RUN] indication goes off.
(or)
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
MODE
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
FWD
RUN
FWD
REV
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
MODE
FWD
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
(2) PU jog operation
Hold down the RUN (or FWD or REV ) key to perform operation, and release it to stop.
1) Set Pr. 15 "jog frequency" and Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration time".
2) Select the PU jog operation mode. (Refer to page 53.)
3) Hold down the RUN (or FWD or REV ) key to perform operation.
(If the motor remains stopped, check Pr. 13 "starting frequency". The motor will not
start if its setting is lower than the starting frequency.
57
3
3.3.4 Combined operation mode 1 (Operation using both external
start signal and control panel)
When the start signal is provided externally (switch etc.) and the running frequency is
set from the control panel (Pr. 79 = 3).
The external frequency setting signal and PU's forward rotation, reverse rotation and
STOP
RESET keys are not accepted. (Note)
Operation command: externally connected start signal
Frequency setting:
/
key of the control panel (FR-PA02-02) or multi-speed
command (multi-speed command has priority) Refer to page 72.
Step
Description
Image
Power on
Switch power on.
ON
1
2
3
4
Operation mode selection
Refer to page 52 and set "3" in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection".
The [PU] and [EXT] indications are lit.
Start
Turn on the start switch (STF or STR).
Note: The motor does not start if both the forward and
reverse rotation switches are turned on. If both
switches are turned on during operation, the motor
decelerates to a stop.
The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward
rotation, or flickers to indicate reverse rotation.
Running frequency setting
Set the running frequency to 60.00Hz with the
/
key.
Flicker
Forward rotation
Reverse
rotation
ON
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
<Step setting>
5
Stop
Turn off the start switch (STF or STR).
The motor stops.
Hz RUN
The [RUN] indication goes off.
A MON
PU EXT
STOP
Note: The RESET
key is made valid if any of "14" to "17" is set in Pr. 75 "PU stop
selection".
58
3.3.5 Combined operation mode 2
When the running frequency is set from a potentiometer connected across terminals
2-5 (frequency setting potentiometer) and the start signal is provided by the RUN key or
FWD / REV key of the control panel (FR-PA02-02). (Pr.79 = 4)
Operation command: RUN key (or FWD / REV key) of the control panel
(FR-PA02-02)
Frequency setting: Externally connected frequency setting potentiometer or multi-speed
command (multi-speed command has priority) Refer to page 72.
Step
Description
Image
Power on
Switch power on.
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
Operation mode selection
Refer to page 51 and set "4" in Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection".
The [PU] and [EXT] indications are lit.
Start
Press the RUN key (or FWD / REV key) of the control panel.
The [RUN] indication is lit to indicate forward rotation, or
flickers to indicate reverse rotation.
Acceleration → Constant speed
Slowly turn the potentiometer connected across terminals
2-5 (frequency setting potentiometer) fully clockwise.
The frequency shown on the display increases gradually to
50.00Hz.
Deceleration
Slowly turn the potentiometer connected across terminals
2-5 (frequency setting potentiometer) fully
counterclockwise.
The frequency shown on the display decreases gradually
to 0.00Hz.
The motor stops running.
Stop
STOP
Press the RESET
key.
The operation command indication RUN goes off.
Flicker
RUN
FWD
REV
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
External potentiometer
3
External potentiometer
Hz
AMON
PU EXT
<Reference> If other frequency is required at fully clockwise position, change Pr. 38
"Frequency at 5V (10V) " setting. (Refer to page 86)
59
C CHAPTER
H A P T E R 44
P PARAMETERS
A R A M E T E R S
This chapter explains the "parameters" of this product.
With the factory settings, the inverter is designed to perform
simple variable-speed operation. Set necessary parameter
values according to the load and operating specifications.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Chapter 1
4.1 Parameter List .......................................................... 60
4.2 Parameter Function Details ...................................... 69
Chapter 2
Note: By making parameter setting, you can change the functions of
contact input terminals RL, RM, RH, MRS, open collector
output terminals RUN, FU, and contact output terminals A, B,
C. Therefore, signal names corresponding to the functions are
used in the description of this chapter (except in the wiring
examples). Note that they are not terminal names.
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
REMARKS
Do not use the copy/verify function between this inverter and another type (CCLink type FR-E520-KN, DeviceNet type FR-E520-KND) inverter.
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
4.1 Parameter List
PARAMETERS
4 PARAMETERS
4.1 Parameter List
4.1.1 Parameter list
Basic functions
Parameter List
Function
Parameter
Number
Setting
Range
0
Torque boost (Note 1)
1
Maximum frequency
0 to 120Hz
2
Minimum frequency
0 to 120Hz
3
Base frequency (Note 1)
0 to 400Hz
4
5
6
Multi-speed setting
(high speed)
Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)
Multi-speed setting
(low speed)
7
Acceleration time
8
Deceleration time
9
Electronic thermal O/L relay
10
11
12
13
14
15
Standard operation functions
Name
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
0 to 30%
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 3600 s/
0 to 360 s
0 to 3600 s/
0 to 360 s
0 to 500A
DC injection brake operation
0 to 120Hz
frequency
DC injection brake operation
0 to 10 s
time
DC injection brake voltage
0 to 30%
Starting frequency
0 to 60Hz
Load pattern selection
0 to 3
(Note 1)
CustoMinimum
Factory Refer
mer
Setting
Setting
To:
Setting
Increments
6%/4%
69
0.1%
(Note 8)
0.01Hz
120Hz
70
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
0Hz
70
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
50Hz
71
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
50Hz
72
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
30Hz
72
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
10Hz
72
(Note 3)
5 s/10s
73
0.1 s/0.01 s
(Note 4)
5 s/10s
73
0.1 s/0.01 s
(Note 4)
Rated
output
75
0.01A
current
(Note 5)
0.01Hz
3Hz
76
(Note 3)
0.1 s
0.5 s
76
0.1%
0.01Hz
6%
0.5Hz
76
77
1
0
78
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
5Hz
79
0.5 s
79
120Hz
70
8888
71
50Hz
73
Jog frequency
0 to 400Hz
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
High-speed maximum
frequency
Base frequency voltage
(Note 1)
Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency
Acceleration/deceleration
time increments
Stall prevention operation
level
Stall prevention operation
level compensation factor at
double speed
(Note 6)
0 to 3600 s/
0.1 s/ 0.01 s
0 to 360 s
120 to
0.1Hz
400Hz
(Note 3)
0 to 1000V,
0.1V
8888,9999
0.01Hz
1 to 400Hz
(Note 3)
0, 1
1
0
73
0 to 200%
0.1%
150%
80
0 to 200%,
9999
0.1%
9999
80
9999
72
9999
72
9999
72
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
Multi-speed setting (speed 5)
9999
0 to 400Hz,
Multi-speed setting (speed 6)
9999
Multi-speed setting (speed 4)
60
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
PARAMETERS
Parameter
Number
27
29
Standard operation functions
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Output
terminal
functions
39
41
42
43
Second functions
44
45
46
47
Additional
function
Automatic
restart Display functions
functions
48
52
55
56
57
CustoMinimum
Factory Refer
mer
Setting
Setting
To:
Setting
Increments
0 to 400Hz,
0.01Hz
9999
72
Multi-speed setting (speed 7)
9999
(Note 3)
Acceleration/deceleration
0, 1, 2
1
0
82
pattern
Regenerative function
0, 1
1
0
83
selection
0 to 400Hz,
0.01Hz
9999
84
Frequency jump 1A
9999
(Note 3)
0 to 400Hz,
0.01Hz
Frequency jump 1B
9999
84
9999
(Note 3)
0 to 400Hz,
0.01Hz
Frequency jump 2A
9999
84
9999
(Note 3)
0 to 400Hz,
0.01Hz
9999
84
Frequency jump 2B
9999
(Note 3)
0 to 400Hz,
0.01Hz
9999
84
Frequency jump 3A
9999
(Note 3)
0 to 400Hz,
0.01Hz
9999
84
Frequency jump 3B
9999
(Note 3)
0,
0.001 r/min
0
85
Speed display
0.01 to 9998
0.01Hz
50Hz
86
Frequency at 5V (10V) input 1 to 400Hz
(Note 3)
(Note 2)
0.01Hz
50Hz
86
Frequency at 20mA input
1 to 400Hz
(Note 3)
(Note 2)
0 to 100%
0.1%
10%
87
Up-to-frequency sensitivity
0.01Hz
Output frequency detection
0 to 400Hz
6Hz
88
(Note 3)
Output frequency detection
0 to 400Hz,
0.01Hz
9999
88
for reverse rotation
9999
(Note 3)
5 s/10 s
Second acceleration/
0 to 3600 s/
73
0.1 s/0.01 s
(Note 10)
deceleration time
0 to 360 s
0 to 3600 s/
Second deceleration time
0 to 360 s, 0.1 s/0.01 s
9999
73
9999
Second torque boost
0 to 30%,
0.1%
9999
69
(Note 1)
9999
Second V/F
0 to 400Hz,
0.01Hz
9999
71
(base frequency) (Note 1)
9999
(Note 3)
Second electronic thermal
0 to 500A,
0.01A
9999
75
O/L relay
9999
Control panel/PU main
0,23,100
1
0
89
display data selection
0.01Hz
Frequency monitoring
50Hz
91
0 to 400Hz
(Note 3)
reference
Rated
Current monitoring reference 0 to 500A
0.01A
output
91
current
0 to 5 s,
0.1 s
9999
92
Restart coasting time
9999
Name
58
Restart cushion time
59
Remote setting function
selection
Setting
Range
0 to 60 s
0.1 s
1.0 s
92
0, 1, 2
1
0
93
61
Parameter List
Function
4
PARAMETERS
Function
Parameter
Number
60
Parameter List
61
62
63
65
Operation selection functions
66
67
68
69
70
Shortest acceleration/
deceleration mode
Reference I for intelligent
mode
Ref. I for intelligent mode
accel
Ref. I for intelligent mode
decel
Retry selection
Stall prevention operation
level reduction starting
frequency (Note 6)
Number of retries at alarm
occurrence
Retry waiting time
Retry count display erasure
Special regenerative brake
duty
71
Applied motor (Note 6)
72
PWM frequency selection
73
0-5V/0-10V selection
74
Filter time constant
Reset selection/
disconnected PU detection/
PU stop selection
Parameter write disable
selection
Reverse rotation prevention
selection
Operation mode selection
(Note 6)
75
77
78
79
General-purpose magnetic
flux vector control
Name
Setting
Range
0, 1, 2, 11,
12
0 to 500A,
9999
0 to 200%,
9999
0 to 200%,
9999
0, 1, 2, 3
0 to 400Hz
CustoMinimum
Factory Refer
mer
Setting
Setting
To:
Setting
Increments
1
0
95
0.01A
9999
95
1%
9999
95
1%
9999
95
1
0
96
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
50Hz
80
0 to 10,
101 to 110
0.1 to 360 s
0
1
0
96
0.1 s
1
1s
0
96
96
0 to 30%
0.1%
0%
83
1
0
98
1
1
99
1
0
100
1
1
102
0 to 3,
14 to 17
1
14
102
0, 1, 2
1
0
104
0, 1, 2
1
0
105
0 to 4,6 to 8
1
0
106
0.01kW
9999
110
0.01A
9999
111
0.1V
200V/
400V
111
50 to 120Hz
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
50Hz
111
0 to 50Ω,
9999
0.001Ω
9999
111
0, 1
1
0
111
0, 1, 3, 5, 6,
13, 15, 16,
23, 100,
101,103,
105, 106,
113, 115,
116,123
0 to 15
0, 1, 10, 11
(Note 9)
0 to 8
0.2 to 7.5kW,
9999
0 to 500A,
9999
80
Motor capacity (Note 6)
82
Motor exciting current
83
Rated motor voltage (Note 6) 0 to 1000V
84
Rated motor frequency
(Note 6)
90
Motor constant (R1)
96
Auto-tuning setting/status
(Note 6)
62
PARAMETERS
Parameter
Number
117
Station number
118
119
120
121
PID control
Additional
function
Current
detection
Setting
Range
1
0
117
Communication speed
48, 96, 192
1
192
117
Stop bit length
0, 1 , 100,
101 (data
length 8)
10, 11, 110,
111 (data
length 7)
1
1
117
0, 1, 2
1
2
117
0 to 10,9999
1
1
117
0.1 s
9999
117
1
9999
117
0, 1, 2
1
1
117
0, 20, 21
0.1 to
1000%,
9999
0.1 to
3600 s,
9999
0 to 100%,
9999
0 to 100%,
9999
1
0
134
0.1%
100%
134
0.1 s
1s
134
0.1%
9999
134
0.1%
9999
134
0 to 100%
0.01%
0%
134
0.01 to
10.00 s,
9999
0.01 s
9999
134
Parity check presence/
absence
Number of communication
retries
Communication check time
interval
123
Waiting time setting
0, 0.1 to
999.8 s,
9999
0 to 150,
9999
128
CR⋅LF presence/absence
selection
PID action selection
129
PID proportional band
130
PID integral time
131
Upper limit
132
Lower limit
133
PID action set point for PU
operation
134
PID differential time
145
Parameter for option (FR-PU04).
146
Parameter set by manufacturer. Do not set.
150
151
152
153
156
158
CustoMinimum
Factory Refer
mer
Setting
Setting
To:
Setting
Increments
0 to 31
122
124
Sub
function
Name
Output current detection
0 to 200%
level
Output current detection
0 to 10 s
period
Zero current detection level 0 to 200.0%
Zero current detection period 0.05 to 1 s
Stall prevention operation
0 to 31,100
selection
AM terminal function selection
0, 1, 2
63
Parameter List
Communication functions
Function
4
0.1%
150%
142
0.1 s
0
142
0.1%
0.01 s
5.0%
0.5 s
143
143
1
0
144
1
0
89
PARAMETERS
Initial Additional
monitor function
User functions
Parameter
Name
Number
User group read selection
160
168
169
Actual operation hour meter
clear
173
User group 1 registration
174
User group 1 deletion
175
User group 2 registration
176
User group 2 deletion
Terminal
assignment functions
181
182
183
190
191
192
232
Multi-speed operation
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
244
245
246
247
CustoMinimum
Factory Refer
mer
Setting
Setting
To:
Setting
Increments
0, 1, 10, 11
1
0
146
Setting
Range
Parameters set by manufacturer. Do not set.
171
180
Sub functions
Parameter List
Function
RL terminal function
selection (Note 6)
RM terminal function
selection (Note 6)
RH terminal function
selection (Note 6)
MRS terminal function
selection (Note 6)
RUN terminal function
selection (Note 6)
FU terminal function
selection (Note 6)
A, B, C terminal function
selection (Note 6)
0

0
148
0 to 999
0 to
999,9999
0 to 999
0 to
999,9999
1
0
146
1
0
146
1
0
146
1
0
146
0 to 8, 16, 18
1
0
148
0 to 8, 16, 18
1
1
148
0 to 8, 16, 18
1
2
148
0 to 8, 16, 18
1
6
148
0 to 99
1
0
150
0 to 99
1
4
150
0 to 99
1
99
150
9999
72
9999
72
9999
72
9999
72
9999
72
9999
72
9999
72
9999
72
1
99
1
0
151
0.01%
9999
152
0.01 s
0.5 s
152
1
9999
152
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
Multi-speed setting (speed 9)
9999
Multi-speed setting
0 to 400Hz,
(speed 10)
9999
Multi-speed setting
0 to 400Hz,
(speed 11)
9999
Multi-speed setting
0 to 400Hz,
(speed 12)
9999
Multi-speed setting
0 to 400Hz,
(speed 13)
9999
Multi-speed setting
0 to 400Hz,
(speed 14)
9999
Multi-speed setting
0 to 400Hz,
(speed 15)
9999
Soft-PWM setting
0, 1
Cooling fan operation
0, 1
selection
0 to 50%,
Rated motor slip
9999
Slip compensation response
0.01 to 10 s
time
Constant-output region slip
0, 9999
compensation selection
Multi-speed setting (speed 8)
64
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
0.01Hz
(Note 3)
1
PARAMETERS
Parameter
Number
250
251
254
338
339
340
342
901
Calibration functions
902
Name
Stop selection
Output phase failure
protection selection
analog polarity reversible
lower limit (Note 11)
Operation command right
(Note 12)
Speed command right (Note
12)
Link start mode selection
(Note 12)
E2PROM write selection
AM terminal calibration
Frequency setting voltage
bias
Setting
Range
CustoMinimum
Factory Refer
mer
Setting
Setting
To:
Setting
Increments
0 to 100 s,
1000 to
1100 s,
8888, 9999
1
9999
153
0, 1
1
1
154
0 to 100%,
9999
0.1%
9999
100
0, 1
1
0
117
0, 1
1
0
117
0, 1
1
0
117
0, 1

0 to 0 to
10V 60Hz
1 to
0 to
400
10V
Hz
0 to
0 to
20
60Hz
mA
0 to 1 to
20
400
mA
Hz
1

0

117
155
0.01Hz
0V 0Hz
157
0.01Hz
5V
50
Hz
157
0.01Hz
4
0Hz
mA
157
0.01Hz
20 50
mA Hz
157
903
Frequency setting voltage
gain
904
Frequency setting current
bias
905
Frequency setting current
gain
990
991
Parameter for option (FR-PU04).
Note: 1. Indicates the parameter of which setting is ignored when the generalpurpose magnetic flux vector control mode is selected.
2. Since calibration is made before shipment from the factory, the settings differ
slightly between inverters. The inverter is preset to provide a frequency
slightly higher than 50Hz.
3. When the control panel is used and the setting is 100Hz or more, the setting
increments are 0.1Hz.
The setting increments are 0.01Hz when the communication mode.
4. The setting depends on the inverter capacity: (0.4K to 3.7K)/(5.5K to 7.5K).
5. Set to 85% of the rated inverter current for the 0.4K, 0.75K.
6. If "2" is set in Pr. 77 (parameter write inhibit selection), the setting cannot be
changed during operation.
7. The half-tone screened parameters allow their settings to be changed during
operation if "0" (factory setting) has been set in Pr. 77 (parameter write
inhibit selection). (However, the Pr. 72 and Pr. 240 values may be changed
during PU operation only.)
8. The setting depends on the inverter capacity: 4% for the FR-E540-5.5K and
7.5K-EC.
9. To set "10" or "11" in Pr. 73, first "801" must set in Pr. 77.
10. For the FR-E540-5.5K and 7.5K-EC, the factory setting is 10s.
11. When setting Pr. 254, set "801" in Pr. 77.
12. Pr. 338 to Pr. 340 are displayed only when the communication option is fitted
or when Pr. 119 is "100, 101, 110 or 111".
65
Parameter List
Computer link
function
Stop
Additional
selection
function
function
Function
4
PARAMETERS
4.1.2 List of Parameters Classified by Purpose of Use
Set the parameters according to the operating conditions. The following list indicates
purpose of use and corresponding parameters.
Related to application
operation
Related to operation
Purpose of Use
Operation mode selection
Acceleration/deceleration
time/pattern adjustment
Selection of output characteristics
optimum for load characteristics
Output frequency restriction (limit)
Operation over 50Hz
Adjustment of frequency setting
signals and outputs
Motor output torque adjustment
Brake operation adjustment
Multi-speed operation
Jog operation
Frequency jump operation
Automatic restart operation after
instantaneous power failure
Optimum acceleration/deceleration
within continuous rated range
Slip compensation setting
Output stop method selection
General-purpose magnetic flux
vector control operation
Electromagnetic brake operation
timing
Offline auto tuning setting
Sub-motor operation
Regenerative function selection
Operation in communication with
personal computer
Operation under PID control
Noise reduction
Parameter Numbers
Parameter numbers which must be set
Pr. 79
Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 29
Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19
Pr. 1, Pr.2, Pr.18
Pr. 1, Pr. 18, Pr. 38, Pr. 39, Pr. 903, Pr. 905
Pr. 38, Pr. 39, Pr. 73, Pr. 254, Pr. 902 to Pr. 905
Pr. 0, Pr. 80
Pr. 10, Pr. 11, Pr. 12
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 6, Pr. 15, Pr. 24,
Pr. 25, Pr. 26, Pr. 27, Pr. 232, Pr. 233, Pr. 234,
Pr. 235, Pr. 236, Pr. 237, Pr. 238, Pr. 239
Pr. 15, Pr. 16
Pr. 31, Pr. 32, Pr. 33, Pr. 34, Pr. 35, Pr. 36
Pr. 57, Pr. 58
Pr. 60
Pr. 245 to Pr. 247
Pr. 250
Pr. 80
Pr. 42, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96
Pr. 0, Pr. 3, Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 9, Pr. 44, Pr. 45,
Pr. 46, Pr. 47, Pr. 48
Pr. 30, Pr. 70
Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 338 to Pr. 340, Pr. 342
Pr. 73, Pr. 79, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134,
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Pr. 72, Pr. 240
66
PARAMETERS
Others
Related to incorrect
operation prevention
Related to
monitoring
Purpose of Use
Frequency meter calibration
Monitor display on control panel
(FR-PA02-02) or parameter unit
(FR-PU04)
Display of speed, etc.
Clearing of inverter's actual
operation time
Parameter Numbers
Parameter numbers which must be set
Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 158, Pr. 901
Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 158, Pr. 901
Pr. 37, Pr. 52
Pr.171
Function write prevention
Pr. 77
Reverse rotation prevention
Pr. 78
Parameter grouping
Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176
Current detection
Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Motor stall prevention
Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 156
Input terminal function assignment
Output terminal function
assignment
Increased cooling fan life
Motor protection from overheat
Automatic restart operation at alarm
stop
Inverter reset selection
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
Pr. 244
Pr. 9, Pr. 71
Pr. 65, Pr. 67, Pr. 68, Pr. 69
Pr. 75
4
67
PARAMETERS
4.1.3 Parameters recommended to be set by the user
We recommend the following parameters to be set by the user.
Set them according to the operation specifications, load, etc.
Parameter
Number
1
2
7
8
Name
Maximum frequency
Minimum frequency
Acceleration time
Deceleration time
9
Electronic thermal O/L
relay
14
Load pattern selection
71
Applied motor
73
0-5V/0-10V selection
901
AM terminal calibration
902
903
904
905
Application
Used to set the maximum and minimum output
frequencies.
Used to set the acceleration and deceleration
times.
Used to set the current of the electronic
overcurrent protection to protect the motor from
overheat.
Used to select the optimum output characteristics
which
match
the
application
and
load
characteristics.
Used to set the thermal characteristics of the
electronic overcurrent protection according to the
motor used.
Used to select the specifications of the frequency
setting signal entered across terminal 2-5 to
perform operation with the voltage input signal.
Used to calibrate the meter connected across
terminals AM-5.
Frequency setting voltage
bias
Frequency setting voltage
Used to set the magnitude (slope) of the output
gain
frequency relative to the frequency setting signal
Frequency setting current
(0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA DC) as desired.
bias
Frequency setting current
gain
68
4.2 Parameter Function Details
PARAMETERS
4.2 Parameter Function Details
4.2.1 Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46)
Related parameters
Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal
function selection)
Pr. 0 "torque boost"
Pr. 46 "second torque boost"
Increase the setting when the inverter-to-motor distance is long or motor torque in the
low-speed range is insufficient, for example;
" Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the load to increase the
starting motor torque.
" You can select either of the two starting torque boosts by RT terminal switching.
Factory
Setting
0
6%/4%
(Note)
46
9999
Setting Range
Remarks
(Note) FR-E520S-0.4K to 2.2K-EC
FR-E540-0.4K to 3.7K-EC
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K-EC: 4%
0 to 30%, 9999 9999: Function invalid
0 to 30%
Output voltage
Parameter
Number
6%
100%
Pr.0
Setting range
Pr.46
Base frequency
0 Output frequency (Hz)
<Setting>
! Assuming that the base frequency voltage is 100%, set the 0Hz voltage in %.
! Pr. 46 "Second torque boost" is valid when the RT signal is on. (Note 3)
! When using the inverter-dedicated motor (constant-torque motor), change the
setting as indicated below:
FR-E540-0.4K, 0.75K-EC, FR-E520S-0.4K, 0.75K-EC........6%
FR-E540-1.5K to 3.7K-EC, FR-E520S-1.5K, 2.2K-EC.........4%
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K-EC ......................................................3%
If you leave the factory setting as it is and change the Pr. 71 value to the setting for
use of the constant-torque motor, the Pr. 0 setting changes to the above value.
Note: 1. This parameter setting is ignored when the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control mode has been selected.
2. A large setting may result in an overheated motor or overcurrent trip. The
guideline for the largest value for this parameter is about 10%.
3. The RT signal serves as the second function selection signal and makes the
other second functions valid. Refer to page 148 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
terminal function selection).
69
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.2 Output frequency range (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)
Related parameters
Pr. 1 "maximum frequency"
Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
Pr. 18 "high-speed maximum frequency"
Pr. 13 "starting frequency"
Pr. 38 "frequency at 5V (10V) input"
Pr. 39 "frequency at 20mA input"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Used to clamp the upper and lower limits of the
output frequency. Used for high-speed operation at or over 120Hz.
" Can be used to set the upper and lower limits of motor speed.
Parameter
Number
1
2
Factory
Setting
120Hz
0Hz
18
120Hz
Output frequency
(Hz)
Setting
Range
0 to 120Hz
0 to 120Hz
120 to
400Hz
Pr.1
Pr.18
Frequency setting
Pr.2
"Output frequency range (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18
0
(4mA)
5,10V
(20mA)
<Setting>
! Use Pr. 1 to set the upper limit of the output frequency. If the frequency of the
frequency command entered is higher than the setting, the output frequency is
clamped at the maximum frequency.
! To perform operation over 120Hz, set the upper limit of the output frequency in
Pr. 18.
(When the Pr. 18 value is set, Pr. 1 automatically changes to the frequency in
Pr. 18. Also, when the Pr. 1 value is set, Pr. 18 automatically changes to the
frequency in Pr. 1.)
! Use Pr. 2 to set the lower limit of the output frequency.
Note:
When the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) connected across
terminals 2-5 is used for operation beyond 50Hz, change the value of Pr. 38
(or Pr. 39 for use of the potentiometer connected across terminals 4-5). If the
Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 value is only changed, the motor cannot run beyond 50Hz.
CAUTION
When the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 "starting frequency" value,
note that the motor will run at the set frequency by merely switching the
start signal on, without entering the command frequency.
70
PARAMETERS
"" Base frequency, base frequency voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47)
4.2.3 Base frequency, base frequency voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47)
Related parameters
Pr. 14 "load pattern selection"
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal
function selection)
Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
Pr. 47 "second V/F (base frequency) "
Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating.
" When running a standard motor, generally set the rated motor frequency. When
running the motor using the commercial power supply-inverter switch-over, set the
base frequency to the same value as the power supply frequency.
" If the frequency given on the motor rating plate is "50Hz" only, always set to "50Hz".
Leaving it as "60Hz" may make the voltage too low and the torque less, resulting in
overload tripping. Care must be taken especially when Pr. 14 "load pattern selection"
= 1.
Parameter
Number
3
Factory
Setting
50Hz
19
8888
0 to 1000V, 8888, 9999
47
9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
Setting Range
Remarks
Output voltage
0 to 400Hz
8888: 95% of power supply voltage
9999: Same as power supply voltage
9999: Function invalid
Pr.19
Output
frequency (Hz)
Pr.3
Pr.47
<Setting>
! Use Pr. 3 and Pr. 47 to set the base frequency (rated motor frequency). Two base
frequencies can be set and the required frequency can be selected from them.
! Pr. 47 "Second V/F (base frequency) " is valid when the RT signal is on. (Note 3)
! Use Pr. 19 to set the base voltage (e.g. rated motor voltage).
Note: 1. Set 60Hz in Pr. 3 "base frequency" when using a Mitsubishi constant-torque
motor.
2. When the general-purpose magnetic flux vector control mode has been
selected, Pr. 3, Pr. 19 and Pr. 47 are made invalid and Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 are
made valid.
However, Pr. 3 or Pr. 47 is made valid for the S-shaped inflection pattern
point of Pr. 29.
3. The RT signal serves as the second function selection signal and makes the
other second functions valid. Refer to page 148 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
terminal function selection).
71
4
PARAMETERS
"" Multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)
4.2.4 Multi-speed operation
(Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)
Related parameters
Pr. 4 "multi-speed setting (high speed)"
Pr. 5 "multi-speed setting (middle speed)"
Pr. 6 "multi-speed setting (low speed)"
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 "multi-speed setting
(speeds 4 to 7)"
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 "multi-speed setting
(speeds 8 to 15)"
Pr. 1 "maximum frequency"
Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration
pattern"
Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal
function selection)
Used to switch between the predetermined running
speeds.
" Any speed can be selected by merely switching on/off the corresponding contact
signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals).
" By using these functions with Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "minimum
frequency", up to 17 speeds can be set.
" Valid in the external operation mode or combined mode (Pr. 79 = 4).
Factory Setting
50Hz
30Hz
10Hz
9999
9999
Setting Range
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
Speed 1
(high speed)
Output frequency(Hz)
Output frequency(Hz)
Parameter Number
4
5
6
24 to 27
232 to 239
Speed 5
Speed 2
Speed 6
(middle speed)
Speed 3
(low speed)
Speed 4
Speed 7
Remarks
9999: Not selected
9999: Not selected
Speed 10
Speed 11
Speed 12
Speed 9
Speed 13
Speed 8
Speed 14
Speed 15
Time
RH
ON
RM
RL
Time
ON ON ON
ON
ON
RH
ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON
RM
ON
RL
REX
ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
<Setting>
! Set the running frequencies in the corresponding parameters.
! Each speed (frequency) can be set as desired between 0 and 400Hz during inverter
operation.
After the required multi-speed setting parameter has been read, the setting can be
changed by pressing the
/
key. In this case, when you release the
/
SET
key, press the
key (
key when using the parameter unit (FR-PU04)) to store
the set frequency.
! Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 to assign the terminal used to input the REX signal.
WRITE
72
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. The multi-speed settings override the main speeds (across terminals 2-5,
4-5).
2. The multi-speeds can also be set in the PU or external operation mode.
3. For 3-speed setting, if two or three speeds are simultaneously selected,
priority is given to the frequency setting of the lower signal.
4. Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 settings have no priority between
them.
5. The parameter values can be changed during operation.
6. When input terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, other
functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding
terminals before making setting.
4.2.5 Acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21,
Pr. 44, Pr. 45)
Related parameters
Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration
pattern"
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency"
Pr. 21 "acceleration/deceleration time increments"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/deceleration time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time.
Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster
speed increase/decrease.
Parameter
Number
7
8
20
Factory Setting
0.4K to 3.7K
5.5K, 7.5K
0.4K to 3.7K
5.5K, 7.5K
50Hz
5s
10s
5s
10s
Setting Range
0 to 3600s/0 to 360s
0 to 3600s/0 to 360s
1 to 400Hz
0: 0 to 3600s
1: 0 to 360s
21
0
0, 1
44
5s (Note)
45
9999
0 to 3600s/0 to 360s
0 to 3600s/
0 to 360s, 9999
9999: acceleration time =
deceleration time
The FR-E540-5.5K-EC and 7.5K-EC are factory-set to 10 s.
Output frequency
(Hz)
Note:
Remarks
Pr.20
Pr.7
Pr.44
Running frequency
Time
Acceleration
Deceleration
73
Pr.8
Pr.45
4
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
! Use Pr. 21 to set the acceleration/deceleration time and minimum setting
increments:
Set value "0" (factory setting).... 0 to 3600 s (minimum setting increments: 0.1 s)
Set value "1".............................. 0 to 360 s (minimum setting increments: 0.01 s)
! When you have changed the Pr. 21 setting, set the deceleration time again.
! Use Pr. 7 and Pr. 44 to set the acceleration time required to reach the frequency set
in Pr. 20 from 0Hz.
! Use Pr. 8 and Pr. 45 to set the deceleration time required to reach 0Hz from the
frequency set in Pr. 20.
! Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is on.
! Set "9999" in Pr. 45 to make the deceleration time equal to the acceleration time
(Pr. 44).
Note: 1. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A (refer to page 82), the set
time is the period required to reach the base frequency set in Pr. 3.
! Acceleration/deceleration time calculation expression when the set
frequency is the base frequency or higher
T
5
4
t = 9 × (Pr. 3)2 × f 2 + 9 T
T: Acceleration/deceleration time setting (s)
f : Set frequency (Hz)
! Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time at the base frequency of 60Hz
(0Hz to set frequency)
Frequency setting (Hz)
Acceleration/
deceleration time (s)
5
15
60
120
200
400
5
15
12
35
27
82
102
305
2. If the Pr. 20 setting is changed, the settings of calibration functions Pr. 903
and Pr. 905 (frequency setting signal gains) remain unchanged.
To adjust the gains, adjust calibration functions Pr. 903 and Pr. 905.
3. When the setting of Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44 or Pr. 45 is "0", the acceleration/
deceleration time is 0.04 seconds. At this time, set 120Hz or less in Pr. 20.
4. When the RT signal is on, the other second functions such as second torque
boost are also selected.
5. If the shortest acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor
acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the shortest
acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system's J
(inertia moment) and motor torque.
74
PARAMETERS
4.2.6 Electronic overcurrent protection (Pr. 9, Pr. 48)
Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L relay"
Pr. 48 "second electronic thermal O/L
relay"
Related parameter
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183
"input terminal function
selection"
Set the current of the electronic overcurrent
protection to protect the motor from overheat.
This feature provides the optimum protective characteristics, including reduced motor
cooling capability, at low speed.
Parameter
Number
9
48
Factory Setting
Rated output
current*
9999
Setting Range
Remarks
0 to 500A
0 to 500A, 9999
9999: Function invalid
*0.4K and 0.75K are set to 85% of the rated inverter current.
<Setting>
! Set the rated current [A] of the motor.
! Setting "0" makes the electronic overcurrent protection (motor protective function)
invalid. (The inverter's protective function is valid.)
! When using a Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, first set "1" in Pr. 71 to choose the
100% continuous torque characteristic in the low-speed range. Then, set the rated
motor current in Pr. 9.
! Pr. 48 "Second electronic thermal O/L relay" is made valid when the RT signal is on.
(Note 4)
Note: 1. When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be
protected by the electronic overcurrent protection. Install an external thermal
relay to each motor.
2. When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and
the setting is small, the protective characteristics of the electronic
overcurrent protection will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external
thermal relay.
3. A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic overcurrent protection.
Use an external thermal relay.
4. The RT signal serves as the second function selection signal and makes the
other second functions valid. Refer to page 148 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
terminal function selection).
75
4
PARAMETERS
"" DC dynamic brake (Pr. 10, Pr. 11, Pr. 12)
4.2.7 DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)
Pr. 10 "DC injection brake operation frequency"
Pr. 11 "DC injection brake operation time"
Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage"
Parameter
Number
10
11
12
Factory
Setting
3Hz
0.5 s
6%
Output frequency
(Hz)
By setting the DC injection brake voltage (torque), operation time and operation
starting frequency, the stopping accuracy of positioning operation, etc. or the timing of
operating the DC injection brake to stop the motor can be adjusted according to the
load.
Setting
Range
0 to 120Hz
0 to 10 s
0 to 30%
Pr.10
Pr.12
DC injection
brake voltage Operation
voltage
Pr.11
Operation
frequency
Time
Time
Operation time
<Setting>
!
!
!
!
Use Pr. 10 to set the frequency at which the DC injection brake operation is started.
Use Pr. 11 to set the period during when the brake is operated.
Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage of the power supply voltage.
When using an inverter-dedicated motor (constant-torque motor), set 6% (factory
setting) in Pr. 12.
CAUTION
Install a mechanical brake. No holding torque is provided.
76
PARAMETERS
4.2.8 Starting frequency (Pr. 13)
Related parameter
Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
Pr. 13 "starting frequency"
You can set the starting frequency between 0
and 60Hz.
! Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is switched on.
Factory
Setting
0.5Hz
Setting
Range
0 to 60Hz
Output frequency
(Hz)
60
Setting range
Parameter
Number
13
Pr.13
0
Foward rotation
Note:
Time
Frequency setting signal(V)
ON
The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value
set in Pr. 13 "starting frequency".
For example, when 5Hz is set in Pr. 13, the motor will not start running until
the frequency setting signal reaches 5Hz.
CAUTION
When the Pr. 13 setting is equal to or less than the Pr. 2 value, note that
merely switching on the start signal will start the motor at the preset
frequency if the command frequency is not input.
4
77
PARAMETERS
4.2.9 Load pattern selection (Pr. 14)
"Load pattern selection (Pr. 14)
Related parameter
Pr. 0 "torque boost"
Pr.46 "second torque boost"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr.180 to Pr.183
(input terminal function selection)
Pr. 14 "load pattern selection"
You can select the optimum output characteristic (V/F characteristic) for the application
and load characteristics.
Parameter
Number
14
Factory
Setting
0
Setting
Range
0 to 3
Pr.14=0
For constant-torque loads
(e.g. conveyor, cart)
Pr.14=1
For variable-torque loads
(Fan, pump)
100%
Output
voltage
100%
Output
voltage
Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.14=2
For lift
Boost for forward rotation...Pr. 0 (Pr.46) setting
Boost for reverse rotation...0%
Pr.14=3
For lift
Boost for forward rotation...0%
Boost for reverse rotation...Pr. 0 (Pr.46) setting
100%
Forward
Output rotation
voltage
100%
Reverse
Output rotation
voltage
Pr.0
Pr.46
Reverse
rotation
Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.0
Pr.46
Forward
rotation
Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
Note: 1. This parameter setting is ignored when the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control mode has been selected.
2. Pr. 46 "second torque boost" is made valid when the RT signal turns on.
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the
other second functions valid.
Refer to page 148 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection).
78
PARAMETERS
"" Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)
4.2.10 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)
Related parameters
Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency"
Pr. 21 "acceleration/deceleration
time increments"
Pr. 15 "jog frequency"
Pr. 16 "jog acceleration/deceleration
time"
Jog operation can be started and stopped by selecting the jog mode from the control
panel and pressing and releasing the RUN key ( FWD , REV key).
! Set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation.
Parameter
Number
15
Factory
Setting
5Hz
Setting
Range
0 to 400Hz
0 to 3600 s
16
0.5 s
0 to 360 s
Remarks
When
Pr. 21 = 0
When
Pr. 21 = 1
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.15
Pr.20
Jog frequency
setting range
Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation
Time
Pr.16
FWD
key
REV
key
ON
ON
Note: 1. In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A, the acceleration/
deceleration time is the period of time required to reach Pr. 3 "base
frequency", not Pr. 20.
2. The acceleration time and deceleration time cannot be set separately for jog
operation.
3. The value set in Pr. 15 "jog frequency" should be equal to or greater than the
Pr. 13 "starting frequency" setting.
Pr. 18 &Refer to Pr. 1, Pr. 2.
Pr. 19 &Refer to Pr. 3.
Pr. 20, Pr. 21 &Refer to Pr. 7, Pr. 8.
79
4
PARAMETERS
"" Stall prevention (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66)
4.2.11 Stall prevention (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66)
Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level"
Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double
speed"
Pr. 66 "stall prevention operation level reduction starting frequency"
! Set the output current level at which the output frequency is adjusted to prevent the
inverter from coming to an alarm stop due to overcurrent etc.
! For high-speed operation at or over the motor base frequency, acceleration may not
be made because the motor current does not increase.
To improve the operation characteristics of the motor in such a case, the stall
prevention level in the high-frequency range can be reduced. This is effective for
operation of a centrifugal separator up to the high-speed range. Normally, set 50Hz
in Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23.
! For operation in the high-frequency range, the current in the locked motor state is
smaller than the rated output current of the inverter and the inverter does not result
in an alarm (protective function is not activated) if the motor is at a stop. To improve
this and activate the alarm, the stall prevention level can be reduced.
Parameter
Number
22
Factory
Setting
150%
23
9999
66
50Hz
Setting
Range
0 to 200%
0 to 200%,
9999
0 to 400Hz
Remarks
9999: Constant
according to Pr. 22
Setting example
(Pr.22=150%, Pr.23=100%, Pr.66=60Hz)
Pr.23 =9999
Current limit
operation level (%)
Stall prevention
operation level (%)
Pr.22
Reduction ratio
compensation
factor (%)
Pr.23
Pr.66
150
90
60
45
30
22.5
0
400Hz
60 100
200
300
400
Output frequency (Hz)
Output frequency (Hz)
80
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
! In Pr. 22, set the stall prevention operation level. Normally set it to 150% (factory
setting). Set "0" in Pr. 22 to disable the stall prevention operation.
! To reduce the stall prevention operation level in the high-frequency range, set the
reduction starting frequency in Pr. 66 and the reduction ratio compensation factor in
Pr. 23.
Calculation expression for stall prevention operation level
Pr. 23−100
Pr. 22−A
]×[
]
Stall prevention operation level (%) = A + B × [
100
Pr. 22−B
Pr. 66 (Hz) × Pr. 22 (%)
Pr. 66 (Hz) × Pr. 22 (%)
where, A = output frequency (Hz) , B =
400Hz
! By setting "9999" (factory setting) in Pr. 23, the stall prevention operation level is
constant at the Pr. 22 setting up to 400Hz.
Note:1. When the fast-response current limit has been set in Pr. 156 (factory setting
has the current limit activated), do not set the Pr. 22 value to 170% or more.
Torque will not be developed by doing so.
2. In vertical lift applications, make setting so that the fast-response current limit
is not activated. Torque may not be produced, causing a gravity drop.
CAUTION
Do not set a small value as the stall prevention operation current.
Otherwise, torque generated will reduce.
Test operation must be performed.
Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the
acceleration time.
Stall prevention operation during constant speed may change the speed
suddenly.
Stall prevention operation during deceleration may increase the
deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance.
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 &Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.
81
4
PARAMETERS
"" Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29)
4.2.12 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29)
Set the acceleration/deceleration pattern.
Factory
Setting
0
Output
frequency(Hz)
Set value 0
[Linear acceleration/deceleration]
Time
Setting
Range
0, 1, 2
Set value 1
[S-shaped
acceleration/deceleration A]
Output
frequency(Hz)
Parameter
Number
29
Related parameters
Pr. 3 "base frequency"
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 20 "acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency"
Pr. 44 "second
acceleration/deceleration time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration
time"
fb
Time
Set value 2
[S-shaped
acceleration/deceleration B]
Output
frequency(Hz)
Pr. 29 "acceleration/deceleration pattern"
f1
f2
Time
<Setting>
Pr. 29 Setting
0
Function
Linear
acceleration/
deceleration
1
S-shaped
acceleration/
deceleration
A
(Note)
2
S-shaped
acceleration/
deceleration
B
Description
Linear acceleration/deceleration is made up/down to the
preset frequency (factory setting).
For machine tool spindles
This setting is used when it is necessary to make
acceleration/deceleration in a short time up to the base
frequency or higher speed range.
In this acceleration/deceleration pattern, fb (base frequency)
is always the inflection point of an S shape, and you can set
the acceleration/deceleration time according to the reduction
in motor torque in the base frequency or higher constantoutput operation range.
For prevention of cargo collapse on conveyor, etc.
This setting provides S-shaped acceleration/deceleration
from f2 (current frequency) to f1 (target frequency), easing
an acceleration/deceleration shock. This pattern has an
effect on the prevention of cargo collapse, etc.
Note: For the acceleration/deceleration time, set the time required to reach the "base
frequency" in Pr. 3, not the "acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" in
Pr. 20. For details, refer to Pr. 7 and Pr. 8.
82
PARAMETERS
"Regenerative brake duty (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)
4.2.13 Regenerative brake duty (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)
Pr. 30 "regenerative function selection"
Pr. 70 "special regenerative brake duty"
! When making frequent starts/stops, use the optional "brake resistor" to increase the
regenerative brake duty.
Parameter
Number
30
70
Factory
Setting
0
0%
Setting
Range
0,1
0 to 30%
<Setting>
(1) When using the brake resistor (MRS), brake unit, high power factor
converter
! Set "0" in Pr. 30.
! The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid.
(2) When using the brake resistors (2 MYSs in parallel) (3.7K is only
allowed)
! Set "1" in Pr. 30.
! Set "6%" in Pr. 70.
(3) When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
! Set "1" in Pr. 30.
! Set "10%" in Pr. 70.
Note: 1. Pr. 70 "regenerative brake duty" indicates the %ED of the built-in brake
transistor operation. The setting should not be higher than the permissible
value of the brake resistor used. Otherwise, the resistor can overheat.
2. When Pr. 30 = "0", Pr. 70 is not displayed but the brake duty is fixed at 3%.
(Fixed at 2% for 5.5K, 7.5K)
WARNING
The value set in Pr. 70 should not exceed the value set to the brake
resistor used.
Otherwise, the resistor can overheat.
83
4
PARAMETERS
"" Frequency jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)
4.2.14 Frequency jump (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)
Pr. 31 "frequency jump 1A"
Pr. 32 "frequency jump 1B"
Pr. 33 "frequency jump 2A"
Pr. 34 "frequency jump 2B"
Pr. 35 "frequency jump 3A"
Pr. 36 "frequency jump 3B"
! When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a
mechanical system, these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped. Up
to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom
point of each area.
! The value set to 1A, 2A or 3A is a jump point and operation is performed at this
frequency.
Factory
Setting
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
Running frequency (Hz)
Parameter
Number
31
32
33
34
35
36
Pr.36
Pr.35
Setting Range
Remarks
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
9999: Function invalid
9999: Function invalid
9999: Function invalid
9999: Function invalid
9999: Function invalid
9999: Function invalid
Frequency jump
Pr.34
Pr.33
Pr.32
Pr.31
<Setting>
! To fix the frequency at 30Hz between Pr. 33 and
Pr. 34 (30Hz and 35Hz), set 35Hz in Pr. 34 and
30Hz in Pr. 33.
! To jump to 35Hz between 30 and 35Hz, set 35Hz in
Pr. 33 and 30Hz in Pr. 34.
Pr.34:35Hz
Pr.33:30Hz
Pr.33:35Hz
Pr.34:30Hz
Note: During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is
valid.
84
PARAMETERS
"" Speed display (Pr. 37)
4.2.15 Speed display (Pr. 37)
Related parameter
Pr. 52 "control panel/PU main
display data selection"
Pr. 37 "speed display"
The unit of the output frequency display of the control panel (FR-PA02-02) and PU
(FR-PU04) can be changed from the frequency to the motor speed or machine speed.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
37
0
Setting
Range
0, 0.01 to
9998
Remarks
0: Output
frequency
<Setting>
! To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for 60Hz operation.
Note: 1. The motor speed is converted into the output frequency and does not match
the actual speed.
2. To change the control panel monitor (PU main display), refer to Pr. 52.
3. As the control panel display is 4 digits, "----" is displayed when the monitored
value exceeds "9999".
4. Only the PU monitor display uses the unit set in this parameter. Set the other
speed-related parameters (e.g. Pr. 1) in the frequency unit.
5. Due to the restrictions of the resolution of the set frequency, the displayed
value may be different from the setting for the second decimal place.
CAUTION
Make sure that the running speed setting is correct.
Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the
machine.
85
4
PARAMETERS
"" Frequency at 5V (10V) input (Pr. 38)
4.2.16 Frequency at 5V (10V) input (Pr. 38)
Related parameters
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 254 "analog polarity reversible
lower limit"
Pr. 902 "frequency setting voltage bias"
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain"
! You can set the frequency
provided when the
frequency setting signal
from the potentiometer
connected across terminals
2-5 (frequency setting
potentiometer) is 5VDC (or
10VDC).
Parameter
Number
38
Output frequency(Hz)
Pr. 38 "frequency at 5V (10V) input"
Pr.38
fm1
Output frequency
range
fm2
Frequency setting signal
Factory Setting
Setting Range
50Hz
1 to 400Hz
5V(10V)
4.2.17 Frequency at 20mA input (Pr. 39)
"Frequency at 20mA input (Pr. 39)
Related parameters
! You can set the frequency
provided when the
frequency setting signal
input across terminals 4-5 is
20mA.
Output frequency(Hz)
Pr. 39 "frequency at 20mA input"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 904 "frequency setting current bias"
Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain"
Pr.39
fm1
Output frequency
range
fm2
Frequency setting signal
Parameter
Number
39
Factory Setting
Setting Range
50Hz
1 to 400Hz
86
20mA
PARAMETERS
"" Up-to-frequency sensitivity (Pr. 41)
4.2.18 Up-to-frequency sensitivity (Pr. 41)
Related parameters
Pr. 41 "up-to-frequency sensitivity"
Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection"
Pr. 191 "FU terminal function selection"
Pr. 192 "A, B, C terminal
function selection"
The ON range of the up-to-frequency signal (SU) output when the output frequency
reaches the running frequency can be adjusted between 0 and ±100% of the running
frequency.
This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency has been reached or
used as the operation start signal etc. for related equipment.
Factory
Setting
10%
Setting
Range
0 to 100%
Output frequency
(Hz)
Parameter
Number
41
Output signal
OFF
SU
Running frequency
Adjustable range Pr.41
Time
ON
OFF
! Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 to allocate the terminal used for SU signal output.
Refer to page 150 for Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection).
Note:
When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, the other
functions may be affected. Check the functions of the corresponding
terminals before making settings.
4
87
PARAMETERS
4.2.19 Output frequency detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43)
"Output frequency detection (Pr. 42, Pr. 43)
Related parameters
Pr. 42 "output frequency detection"
Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection"
Pr. 191 "FU terminal function selection"
Pr. 192 "A, B, C terminal
function selection"
Pr. 43 "output frequency detection for
reverse rotation"
The output frequency detection signal (FU) is
output when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the setting. This function can be
used for electromagnetic brake operation, open signal etc.
! You can also set the detection of the frequency used exclusively for reverse rotation.
This function is effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation
between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical lift operation
etc.
Parameter
Number
42
43
Factory
Setting
6Hz
9999
Setting Range
Remarks
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz, 9999
9999: Same as Pr. 42 setting
<Setting>
Output frequency
(Hz)
Refer to the figure below and set the corresponding parameters:
! When Pr. 43 ≠ 9999, the Pr. 42 setting applies to forward rotation and the Pr. 43
setting applies to reverse rotation.
! Assign the terminal used for FU signal output with any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
(output terminal function selection).
Refer to page 150 for Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection).
Output signal
FU
Note:
Pr.42
Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation
ON
OFF
Time
Pr.43
ON
OFF
OFF
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 may affect the
other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
88
PARAMETERS
Pr. 44, Pr. 45 &Refer to Pr. 7.
Pr. 46 &Refer to Pr. 0.
Pr. 47 &Refer to Pr. 3.
Pr. 48 &Refer to Pr. 9
4.2.20 Monitor display (Pr. 52, Pr. 158)
Pr. 52 "control panel/PU main display
data selection"
Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 37 "speed display"
Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring
reference"
Pr. 56 "current monitoring
reference"
Pr. 171 "actual operation hour
meter clear"
Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration"
You can select the signals shown on the control panel (FR-PA02-02) /parameter unit
(FR-PU04) main display screen and the signal output to the AM terminal.
! The analog output terminal AM is provided for signal output. Select the signal using
Pr. 158.
Parameter
Number
52
158
Factory
Setting
0
0
Setting
Range
0, 23, 100
0, 1, 2
4
89
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Set Pr. 52 and Pr. 158 in accordance with the following table:
Signal Type
Output
frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Alarm display
Actual
operation time
Unit
Parameter Setting
Pr. 52
Pr. 158
Control
PU main
AM
panel
monitor
terminal
LED
Full-Scale Value of
AM Level Meter
Hz
0/100
0/100
0
Pr. 55
A


0/100
0/100
0/100
0/100
0/100
0/100
1
2
Pr. 56
400V or 800V

10h
23
23
×
×

When 100 is set in Pr. 52, the monitored values during stop and during operation differ
as indicated below:
Pr. 52
0
During
operation/during stop
Output
frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Alarm display
100
Output frequency
During stop
During operation
Set frequency
Output frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Alarm display
Note: 1. During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence is displayed.
2. During MRS, the values are the same as during a stop.
During offline auto tuning, the tuning status monitor has priority.
Note: 1. The monitoring of items marked × cannot be selected.
2. By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of "output frequency to alarm display"
can be selected in sequence by the SET key.
3. Running speed on the PU main monitor is selected by "other monitor
selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04).
4. The actual operation time displayed by setting "23" in Pr. 52 is calculated
using the inverter operation time. (Inverter stop time is not included.) Set "0"
in Pr. 171 to clear it.
5. The actual operation time is calculated from 0 to 99990 hours, then cleared,
and recalculated from 0. If the operation time is less than 10 hours there is
no display.
6. The actual operation time is not calculated if the inverter has not operated
for more than 1 hour continuously.
7. When the control panel is used, the display unit is Hz or A only.
90
PARAMETERS
"" Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56)
4.2.21 Monitoring reference (Pr. 55, Pr. 56)
Related parameters
Pr. 158 "AM terminal function
selection"
Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration"
Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring reference"
Pr. 56 "current monitoring reference"
Set the frequency or current which is referenced when the output frequency or output
current is selected for the AM terminal.
Parameter
Number
55
56
Factory
Setting
50Hz
Rated output
current
Setting
Range
0 to 400Hz
0 to 500A
10VDC (terminal AM)
Output or display
Output or display
10VDC (terminal AM)
Output frequency Pr.55
Output current
Pr.56
<Setting>
Refer to the above diagrams and set the frequency monitoring reference value in
Pr. 55 and the current monitoring reference value in Pr. 56.
Pr. 55 is set when Pr. 158 = 0 and Pr. 56 is set when Pr. 158 = 1.
In Pr. 55 and Pr. 56, set the frequency and current at which the output voltage of
terminal AM will be 10V.
Note:
The maximum output voltage of terminal AM is 10VDC.
4
91
PARAMETERS
"" Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57, Pr. 58)
4.2.22 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
(Pr. 57, Pr. 58)
Pr. 57 "restart coasting time"
Pr. 58 "restart cushion time"
! You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor (with the motor coasting)
when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure.
Parameter Number
57
58
Factory Setting
9999
1.0 s
Setting Range
0 to 5 s, 9999
0 to 60 s
Remarks
9999: No restart
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number
Setting
0
57
0.4K to 1.5K
2.2K to 7.5K
0.1 to 5 s
9999
58
0 to 60 s
Description
0.5 s coasting time
Generally use this setting.
1.0 s coasting time
Waiting time for inverter-triggered restart after power is restored
from an instantaneous power failure. (Set this time between 0.1 s
and 5 s according to the inertia moment (J) and torque of the
load.)
No restart
Normally the inverter may be run with the factory settings. These
values are adjustable to the load (inertia moment, torque).
Instantaneous power
failure (power failure) time
Power supply
(L1, L2, L3)
STF(STR)
Motor speed
(r/min)
Inverter output
frequency
(Hz)
Inverter output
voltage
(V)
Coasting time
Pr. 57 setting
Restart
voltage
rise time
Pr. 58 setting
Note: 1. Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure uses a reduced-voltage
starting system in which the output voltage is raised gradually with the preset
frequency unchanged, independently of the coasting speed of the motor.
As in the FR-A024S/A044, a motor coasting speed detection system (speed
search system) is not used but the output frequency before an instantaneous
power failure is output. Therefore, if the instantaneous power failure time is
longer than 0.2 s, the frequency before the instantaneous power failure
cannot be stored and the inverter will start at 0Hz.
2. The SU and FU signals are not output during restart but are output after the
restart cushion time has elapsed.
92
PARAMETERS
CAUTION
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been
selected, the motor and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time
has elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.
Stay away from the motor and machine.
When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure, apply the supplied CAUTION seals in easily visible places.
STOP
When the start signal is turned off or the RESET
key is pressed during the
cushion time for automatic restart after instantaneous power failure,
deceleration starts after the automatic restart cushion time set in Pr. 58
"cushion time for automatic restart after instantaneous power failure"
has elapsed.
"" Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59)
4.2.23 Remote setting function selection (Pr. 59)
Pr. 59 "remote setting function selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 1 "maximum frequency"
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 18 "high-speed maximum
frequency"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/
deceleration time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration time"
If the operator panel is located away from the
control box, you can use contact signals to
perform continuous variable-speed operation,
without using analog signals.
! By merely setting this parameter, you can use
the acceleration, deceleration and setting clear
functions of the motorized speed setter (FR-FK).
! When the remote function is used, the output frequency of the inverter can be
compensated for as follows:
External operation mode
Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus built-in
frequency setting potentiometer or external analog
frequency command
PU operation mode
Frequency set by RH/RM operation plus PU's digitallyset frequency
Factory
Setting
0
Output
frequency (Hz)
Parameter
Number
59
Setting
Range
0, 1, 2
When Pr. 59=1
(Note)
When Pr. 59=2
0Hz
ON
Acceleration (RH)
Deceleration (RM)
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation (STF)
Power supply
Note:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
External operation frequency or PU operation frequency other than multi-speed
93
4
PARAMETERS
"
Pr. 59
Setting
Remote setting function
0
1
2
No
Yes
Yes
Operation
Frequency setting storage function
(E2PROM)

Yes
No
! Use Pr. 59 to select whether the remote setting function is used or not and whether
the frequency setting storage function* in the remote setting mode is used or not.
When "remote setting function - yes" is selected, the functions of signals RH, RM
and RL are changed to acceleration (RH), deceleration (RM) and clear (RL). Use
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection) to set signals RH, RM and RL.
* Frequency setting storage function
The remote setting frequency (frequency set by RH, RM operation) is stored into
memory. When power is switched off once, then on again, operation is resumed at
this setting of the output frequency. (Pr. 59=1)
<Frequency setting storage condition>
! Frequency at the time when the start signal (STF or STR) has switched off
! Frequency at the time when the RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration)
signals have remained off for more than 1 minute
Note: 1. The frequency can be varied by RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration)
between 0 and the maximum frequency (Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 setting).
2. When the acceleration or deceleration signal switches on, the set frequency
varies according to the slope set in Pr. 44 or Pr. 45. The output frequency
acceleration/deceleration times are as set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8, respectively.
Therefore, the longer preset times are used to vary the actual output frequency.
3. If the start signal (STF or STR) is off, turning on the acceleration (RH) or
deceleration (RM) signal varies the set frequency.
Output
frequency(Hz)
REMARKS
A restart (STF signal ON) after ON-OFF of the clear signal (RL) should be made after
more than 1 minute has elapsed. The output frequency provided when a restart is
made within 1 minute is the output frequency given after the clear signal (RL) is
turned off (multi-speed frequency).
Acceleration (RH)
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation (STF)
Power supply
(*2)
(*1)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1 minute or less
ON
ON
ON
ON
More than 1 minute
(*1) External operation frequency or PU operation frequency except multi-speed
(*2) Multi-speed frequency
CAUTION
When selecting this function, re-set the maximum frequency according to
the machine.
94
PARAMETERS
4.2.24 Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 60 to Pr. 63)
Pr. 60 "shortest acceleration/deceleration mode"
Pr. 61 "reference I for intelligent mode"
Related parameters
Pr. 62 "ref. I for intelligent mode accel"
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 63 "ref. I for intelligent mode decel"
The inverter automatically sets appropriate parameters for operation.
! If you do not set the acceleration and deceleration times and V/F pattern, you can
run the inverter as if appropriate values had been set in the corresponding
parameters. This operation mode is useful to start operation immediately without
making fine parameter settings.
Parameter
Number
60
61
62
63
Factory
Setting
0
9999
9999
9999
Setting Range
0, 1, 2, 11, 12
0 to 500A, 9999
0 to 200%, 9999
0 to 200%, 9999
Remarks
9999: Referenced from rated inverter current.
"" Acceleration/deceleration reference current (Pr. 61, Pr. 62, Pr. 63)
<Setting1>
Pr. 60
Setting
0
1, 2, 11,
12
Operation
Mode
Ordinary
operation
mode
Description
Automatically
Set
Parameters


Set to accelerate/decelerate the motor in the
shortest time.
The inverter makes acceleration/deceleration in the
shortest time using its full capabilities. During
Shortest
deceleration, an insufficient brake capability may
acceleration/ cause the regenerative overvoltage alarm (E.OV3).
Stall prevention operation level 150%
deceleration "1" :
"2" :
Stall prevention operation level 180%
mode
"11":
Stall prevention operation level 150%
when brake resistor or brake unit is used
"12":
Stall prevention operation level 180%
when brake resistor or brake unit is used
95
Pr. 7, Pr. 8
4
PARAMETERS
<Setting2>
! Set the parameters when it is desired to improve the performance in the shortest
acceleration/deceleration mode.
(1) Pr. 61 "reference I for intelligent mode"
Setting
9999 (factory setting)
0 to 500A
Reference Current
Referenced from rated inverter current
Referenced from setting (rated motor current)
(2) Pr. 62 "ref. I for intelligent mode accel"
The reference current setting can be changed.
Setting
9999 (factory setting)
0 to 200%
Reference Current
150% (180%) is the limit value.
The setting of 0 to 200% is the limit value.
(3) Pr. 63 "ref. I for intelligent mode decel"
The reference current setting can be changed.
Setting
9999 (factory setting)
0 to 200%
Note:
Reference Current
150% (180%) is the limit value.
The setting of 0 to 200% is the limit value.
Pr. 61 to Pr. 63 are only valid when any of "1, 2, 11, 12" are selected for
Pr. 60.
" Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67, Pr. 68, Pr. 69)
4.2.25 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)
Pr. 65 "retry selection"
Pr. 67 "number of retries at alarm occurrence"
Pr. 68 "retry waiting time"
Pr. 69 "retry count display erasure"
When any protective function (major fault) is activated and the inverter stops its output,
the inverter itself resets automatically and performs retries. You can select whether
retry is made or not, alarms reset for retry, number of retries made, and waiting time.
Parameter
Number
65
67
68
69
Factory
Setting
0
0
1s
0
Setting Range
0 to 3
0 to 10, 101 to 110
0.1 to 360 s
0
96
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Use Pr. 65 to select the protective functions (major faults) which execute retry.
Errors Reset
for Retry
Display
E.OC1
E.OC2
E.OC3
E.OV1
E.OV2
E.OV3
E.THM
E.THT
E.FIN
E. BE
E. GF
E. LF
E.OHT
E.OLT
E.OPT
E. PE
E.PUE
E.RET
E.CPU
E. 3
E. 6
E. 7
Note:
Setting
0
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
1
"
"
"
2
"
"
"
3
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
" indicates the retry items selected.
Use Pr. 67 to set the number of retries at alarm occurrence.
Pr. 67 Setting
0
1 to 10
101 to 110
Number of Retries
Retry is not made.
1 to 10 times
1 to 10 times
Alarm Signal Output

Not output.
Output.
! Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm occurs until a restart
in the range 0.1 to 360 seconds.
! Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart
times made by retry. The setting of "0" erases the cumulative number of times.
Note: 1. The cumulative number in Pr. 69 is incremented by "1" when retry operation
is regarded as successful, i.e. when normal operation is continued without
the protective function (major fault) activated during a period five times
longer than the time set in Pr. 68.
2. If the protective function (major fault) is activated consecutively within a
period five times longer than the above waiting time, the control panel may
show data different from the most recent data or the parameter unit
(FR-PU04) may show data different from the first retry data. The data stored
as the error reset for retry is only that of the protective function (major fault)
which was activated the first time.
3. When an inverter alarm is reset by the retry function at the retry time, the
stored data of the electronic over current protection, etc. are not cleared.
(Different from the power-on reset.)
97
4
PARAMETERS
"
CAUTION
When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and
machine unless required. They will start suddenly (after the reset time
has elapsed) after occurrence of an alarm.
When you have selected the retry function, apply the supplied CAUTION
seals in easily visible places.
Pr. 66 &Refer to Pr. 22.
Pr. 70 &Refer to Pr. 30.
"Applied motor (Pr. 71)
4.2.26 Applied motor (Pr. 71)
Related parameters
Pr. 0 "torque boost"
Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage"
Pr. 19 "base frequency voltage"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 96 "auto-tuning setting/status"
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Set the motor used.
! When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, set "1" in Pr. 71 for either V/F
control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
The electronic overcurrent protection is set to the thermal characteristic of the
constant-torque motor.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting Range
71
0
0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 13, 15, 16, 23, 100, 101,
103, 105, 106, 113, 115, 116, 123
<Setting>
! Refer to the following list and set this parameter according to the motor used.
Pr. 71
Setting
Thermal Characteristics of Electronic
Overcurrent Protection
0, 100
Thermal characteristics matching a standard motor
Thermal characteristics matching the Mitsubishi
constant-torque motor
Standard motor
Constant-torque motor
Select "offline auto tuning
Mitsubishi generalsetting".
purpose motor SFJR4P (1.5kW or less)
Standard motor
Star
Motor
Constant-torque motor connection constants can
be entered
Standard motor
Delta
directly.
connection
Constant-torque motor
1, 101
3, 103
13, 113
23, 123
5, 105
15, 115
6, 106
16, 116
98
Applied motor
ConstantStandard
Torque
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
PARAMETERS
By setting any of "100 to 123", the electronic overcurrent protection thermal characteristic
(applied motor) can be changed as indicated below according to the ON/OFF status of the RT
signal:
RT Signal
OFF
ON
Electronic Overcurrent Protection Thermal Characteristic (Applied Motor)
As indicated in the above table
Constant-torque motor
CAUTION
Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used.
Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.
"" PWM carrier frequency (Pr. 72, Pr. 240)
4.2.27 PWM carrier frequency (Pr. 72, Pr. 240)
Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection"
Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM setting"
You can change the motor tone.
! By parameter setting, you can select Soft-PWM control which changes the motor
tone.
! Soft-PWM control changes motor noise from a metallic tone into an unoffending
complex tone.
Parameter Number
Factory Setting
Setting Range
72
1
0 to 15
240
1
0, 1
Remarks
0 : 0.7kHz,
15 : 14.5kHz
1: Soft-PWM valid
<Setting>
! Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number
Setting
72
0 to 15
240
0
1
Description
PWM carrier frequency can be changed.
The setting displayed is in [kHz].
Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz and 15 indicates 14.5kHz.
Soft-PWM invalid
When any of "0 to 5" is set in Pr. 72, Soft-PWM is made valid.
Note: 1. Note that when the inverter is run at the ambient temperature above 40°C
with a 2kHz or higher value set in Pr. 72, the rated output current of the
inverter must be reduced. (Refer to page 186 (depending upon the inverter.)
2. An increased PWM frequency will decrease motor noise but noise and
leakage current will increase. Take proper action (refer to pages 32 to 37).
99
4
PARAMETERS
"" Voltage input (Pr. 73)
4.2.28 Voltage input (Pr. 73, Pr. 254)
Related parameters
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Pr. 254 "analog polarity reversible lower
limit "
Pr. 38 "frequency at 5V (10V) input"
Pr. 902 "frequency setting voltage bias"
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain"
! You can change the input (terminal 2) specifications in response to the frequency
setting voltage signal. When entering 0 to 10VDC, always make this setting.
Parameter Number
73
Factory Setting
0
254
9999
Note:
Setting Range
0, 1, 10, 11 (Note)
0 to 100%,
9999 (Note)
Remarks
9999 : Function invalid
When setting "10" or "11" in Pr. 73 and any value in Pr. 254, set "801" in Pr. 77.
Parameter Number
73
Setting
0
1
10
11
Terminal 2 Input Voltage
For 0 to 5VDC input (factory setting)
For 0 to 10VDC input
For 0 to 5VDC input
For 0 to 10VDC input
Polarity Reversible
No
Valid
Note: 1. To change the maximum output frequency at the input of the maximum
frequency command voltage, use Pr. 38. Also, the acceleration/deceleration
time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency, is not affected by the change in Pr. 73 setting.
2. When connecting a frequency setting potentiometer across terminals 10-2-5
for operation, always set "0" in this parameter.
" Polarity reversible operation
By changing the input voltage, you can switch between forward rotation and reverse
rotation.
Set "801" in Pr. 77 and "10" or "11" in Pr. 73 to make this function valid.
1) Set the output frequency using Pr. 902 "frequency setting voltage bias" and Pr. 903
"frequency setting voltage gain".
Ex.) When setting 0Hz and 2.5V in Pr.902 and 50Hz and 5V in Pr. 903 to give a
forward rotation command
Output frequency[Hz]
Output frequency[Hz]
Pr. 903
Pr. 903
Pr. 902
Forward
Input voltage
0Hz
rotation
0V
(Terminal 2)
0Hz 2.5V
5V
Reverse
[V]
(10V)
(5V)
rotation
Pr. 902
0V
(0V)
Forward
Input voltage
rotation
(Terminal 2)
2.5V
5V
[V]
(5V)
(10V)
Use Pr. 73
Use Pr. 73
Output frequency[Hz]
Output frequency[Hz]
Pr. 73 = "0" or "1"
Pr. 73 = "10" or "11"
When Pr.73 = "10" as factory-set, Pr.902 = 2.5V. When Pr.73 = "11", Pr.902 = 5V.
100
PARAMETERS
2) Pr.254 " analog polarity reversible lower limit "
The lower limit of the analog voltage value applied across terminals 2-5 can be set.
(This setting will prevent a reversible operation (rotation) when the analog voltage
applied across terminals 2-5 drops.)
Terminal 2 input voltage is 0V = 0% and 5V (10V) = 100%.
Note: Set "10" or "11" in Pr. 73 and any value in Pr. 254 to make this function valid.
<Output frequency under the following conditions>
" When analog voltage value < Pr. 254 setting (%), output frequency of inverter is 0Hz.
" When Pr. 254 setting (%) ≤ analog
Output frequency[Hz]
voltage value (%) ≤ Pr. 254 setting
Pr. 254+5.0%
Pr. 903
(%) + 5.0%, output frequency is
Pr. 254
Forward
same as when Pr. 254 setting (%) +
Pr. 902
Input voltage
0Hz
rotation
5.0%
(Terminal 2)
5V
Reverse 2.5V
Ex.) When setting "10"or "11" in 0V
[V]
(10V)
(0V)
rotation (5V)
Pr. 73, 0Hz and 2.5V in 0%
100%
50%
Pr. 902, and 50Hz and 5V in
Use Pr. 73
Pr. 903 to give a forward
Output frequency[Hz]
rotation command
REMARKS
A reversible operation can not be performed during PID control.
Note:
If "801" is set in Pr. 77, be sure to reset it to the original setting.
WARNING
Do not design the wiring and facility which will make the voltage lower
than the Pr. 902 setting suddenly.
Doing so can cause the inverter to provide reverse rotation output if the
analog signal wiring is disconnected or the speed command analog
signal turns to 0V, resulting in hazardous conditions.
4
101
PARAMETERS
"" Input filter time constant (Pr. 74)
4.2.29 Input filter time constant (Pr. 74)
Pr. 74 "filter time constant"
You can set the input section's internal filter constant for an external voltage or current
frequency setting signal.
! Effective for eliminating noise in the frequency setting circuit.
! Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to
noise. A larger setting results in slower response. (The time constant can be set
between approximately 1ms to 1s with the setting of 0 to 8. A larger setting results in
a larger filter time constant.)
Parameter
Number
74
Factory
Setting
1
Setting
Range
0 to 8
4.2.30 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop
selection (Pr. 75)
Pr. 75 "reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection"
You can select the reset input acceptance, control panel (FR-PA02-02) or PU (FRPU04) connector disconnection detection function and PU stop function.
! Reset selection
: You can select the reset function input timing.
! PU disconnection detection : When it is detected that the control panel (FR-PA02-02)
/PU (FR-PU04) is disconnected from the inverter for
more than 1 second, the inverter outputs an alarm
code (E.PUE) and comes to an alarm stop.
! PU stop selection
: When an alarm occurs in any operation mode, you can
STOP
stop the inverter from the PU by pressing the RESET
key.
Parameter
Number
75
Factory
Setting
14
Setting Range
0 to 3, 14 to 17
102
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Pr. 75
Setting
0
1
2
3
14
15
16
17
PU Disconnection
Detection
Reset Selection
Reset input normally enabled.
If the PU is disconnected,
Reset input enabled only when the operation will be continued.
protective function is activated.
Reset input normally enabled.
When the PU is
disconnected, an error is
Reset input enabled only when the displayed on the PU and the
protective function is activated.
inverter output is shut off.
Reset input normally enabled.
If the PU is disconnected,
Reset input enabled only when the operation will be continued.
protective function is activated.
Reset input normally enabled.
When the PU is
disconnected, an error is
Reset input enabled only when the displayed on the PU and the
protective function is activated.
inverter output is shut off.
How to make a restart after a stop by the
STOP
RESET
PU Stop
Selection
Pressing the
STOP
RESET key
decelerates the
inverter to a stop
only in the PU
operation mode.
Pressing the
STOP
RESET key
decelerates the
inverter to a stop
in any of the PU,
external and
communication
operation modes.
key on the PU
(1) Control panel (FR-PA02-02)
1) After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal.
.
2) Press the MODE key two times* to display
Note:
When Pr. 79 = 3, press the MODE key three times to display
key and proceed to step 3).
press the
. Then,
(For the monitor screen) ..... Refer to page 50 for the monitor display provided by
pressing the MODE key.
3) Press the SET key.
4) Switch on the STF or STR signal.
(2) Parameter unit (FR-PU04)
1) After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal.
2) Press the EXT key.
3) Switch on the STF or STR signal.
Speed
4
Time
SET
Control panel
STF
ON
(STR) OFF
STOP
RESET
key
key
Stop and restart example for external operation
The other way of making a restart other than the above method is to perform a
power-reset or to make a reset with the inverter reset terminal.
103
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. By entering the reset signal (RES) during operation, the inverter shuts off
output while it is reset, the data of the electronic overcurrent protection and
regenerative brake duty are reset, and the motor coasts.
2. The PU disconnection detection function judges that the PU is disconnected
when it is removed from the inverter for more than 1 second. If the PU had
been disconnected before power-on, it is not judged as an alarm.
3. To resume operation, reset the inverter after confirming that the PU is
connected securely.
4. The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. Also, if parameter (all) clear is
executed, this setting will not return to the initial value.
5. When the inverter is stopped by the PU stop function, PS is displayed but an
alarm is not output.
When the PU connector is used for RS-485 communication operation, the
reset selection and PU stop selection functions are valid but the PU
disconnection detection function is invalid.
CAUTION
Do not reset the inverter with the start signal on.
Otherwise, the motor will start instantly after resetting, leading to
potentially hazardous conditions.
"Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77)
4.2.31 Parameter write inhibit selection (Pr. 77)
Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
You can select between write-enable and disable for parameters. This function is used
to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by incorrect operation.
Parameter
Number
77
Factory
Setting
0
Setting Range
0, 1, 2
104
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Pr. 77
Setting
Function
Parameter values may only be written during a stop in the
PU operation mode. (Note 1)
Write disabled.
Values of Pr. 22, Pr. 75, Pr. 77 and Pr. 79 "operation
mode selection" can be written.
Write enabled even during operation.
0
1
2
Note: 1. The parameters half-tone screened in the parameter list can be set at any
time.
2. If Pr. 77 = "2", the values of Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 71, Pr. 79, Pr. 80, Pr. 83,
Pr. 84, Pr. 96, Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 cannot be written
during operation. Stop operation when changing their parameter settings.
3. By setting "1" in Pr. 77, the following clear operations can be inhibited:
! Parameter clear
! All clear
4.2.32 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)
Related parameters
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 78 "reverse rotation prevention
selection"
This function can prevent any reverse rotation fault resulting from the incorrect input of
the start signal.
! Used for a machine which runs only in one direction, e.g. fan, pump.
(The setting of this function is valid for the combined, PU, external and
communication operations.)
Parameter
Number
78
Factory
Setting
0
Setting
Range
0, 1, 2
<Setting>
Pr. 78 Setting
0
1
2
Function
Both forward and reverse
rotations allowed
Reverse rotation disallowed
Forward rotation disallowed
105
4
PARAMETERS
"" Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)
4.2.33 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)
Related parameters
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
"multi-speed operation"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183
(input terminal function
selection)
Pr. 338 "operation command right"
Pr. 339 "speed command right"
Pr. 340 "link start mode selection"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Used to select the operation mode of the inverter.
The inverter can be run from the control panel or
parameter unit (PU operation), with external
signals (external operation), by combination of PU
operation and external operation (external/PU
combined operation), or by computer link
operation.
When power is switched on (factory setting), the external operation mode is selected.
Parameter
Number
79
Factory
Setting
0
Setting
Range
0 to 4, 6 to 8
<Setting>
In the following table, operation using the control panel or parameter unit is
abbreviated to PU operation.
Pr. 79
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
Function
When power is switched on, the external operation mode is selected.
PU or external operation can be selected by pressing the keys of the control panel or
parameter unit. (Refer to page 53) For these modes, refer to the setting 1 and 2 below.
Operation mode
Running frequency
Start signal
RUN
FWD
Digital setting made by the key
(
, REV ) key of
PU operation
operation of the control panel or control panel or FWD or REV
mode
parameter unit
key of parameter unit
External signal input (across
External
External signal input
terminals 2 (4)-5, multi-speed
operation mode
(terminal STF, STR)
selection)
External/PU
Digital setting made by the key
combined
operation of the control panel or External signal input
operation mode
parameter unit, or external signal (terminal STF, STR)
1
input (multi-speed setting only)
External/PU
RUN ( FWD , REV ) key of
External signal input (across
combined
terminals 2 (4)-5, multi-speed
control panel or FWD or REV
operation mode
selection)
key of parameter unit
2
Switch-over mode
Switch-over between PU, external and computer link operation modes can be done
while running.
External operation mode (PU operation interlock)
MRS signal ON ......... Able to be switched to PU operation mode (output
stop during external operation)
MRS signal OFF ........ Switching to PU operation mode inhibited
Switching to other than external operation mode (disallowed during operation)
X16 signal ON............ Switched to external operation mode
X16 signal OFF .......... Switched to PU operation mode
106
PARAMETERS
Note:
Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PU/external combined operation.
These settings differ in starting method.
(1) Switch-over mode
During operation, you can change the current operation mode to another operation
mode.
Operation Mode
Switching
External operation to PU
operation
External operation to
computer link operation
(Net mode communication)
PU operation to external
operation
PU operation to computer
link operation
(Net mode communication)
Computer link operation
(Net mode communication)
to external operation
Computer link operation
(Net mode communication)
to PU operation
Switching Control/Operating Status
1) Operate the control panel keys to select the PU operation
mode.
"
Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation.
"
Set frequency is the same as the external frequency setting
signal value. (Note that the setting will disappear when
power is switched off or the inverter is reset.)
1) Mode change command to computer link mode is transmitted
from the computer.
"
Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation.
"
Set frequency is as set by the potentiometer (frequency
setting potentiometer). (Note that the setting will disappear
when power is switched off or the inverter is reset.)
1) Operate the control panel keys to select the external operation
mode.
"
Rotation direction is determined by the external operation
input signal.
"
Set frequency is determined by the external frequency
setting signal.
1) Mode change command to computer link mode is transmitted
from the computer.
"
Rotation direction and set frequency are the same as those
of PU operation.
1) The switch-over command to the external mode is sent from
the computer.
"
Rotation direction is determined by the external operation
input signal.
"
Set frequency is determined by the external frequency
setting signal.
1) Operate the control panel keys to select the PU operation
mode.
"
Rotation direction and set frequency are the same as those
of computer link operation.
*Refer to page 117 for computer link operation (NET mode communication).
107
4
PARAMETERS
(2) PU operation interlock
PU operation interlock forces the operation mode to be changed to the external
operation mode when the MRS signal switches off. This function prevents the inverter
from being inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally left
unswitched from the PU operation mode.
1) Preparation
! Set "7" in Pr. 79 (PU operation interlock).
! Set the terminal used for MRS signal input with any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
terminal function selection).
Refer to page 148 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection).
Note:
When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, the other
functions may be affected.
Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.
2) Function
MRS Signal
ON
OFF
Function/Operation
Output stopped during external operation.
Operation mode can be switched to PU operation mode.
Parameter values can be rewritten in PU operation
mode.
PU operation allowed.
Forcibly switched to external operation mode.
External operation allowed.
Switching to PU operation mode inhibited.
<Function/operation changed by switching on-off the MRS signal>
Operating Condition
Operation
mode
Status
During stop
PU
During
operation
MRS Signal
Operation
Mode
(Note 4)
Operating Status
Parameter
Write
Switching to
PU Operation
Mode
During stop
Allowed →
disallowed
Disallowed
Allowed →
disallowed
Disallowed
ON → OFF
(Note 3)
ON → OFF
(Note 3)
If external operation
frequency setting
External
and start signal are
entered, operation is
performed in that
status.
OFF → ON
During stop
During stop
ON → OFF
External
External
During
operation
OFF → ON
ON → OFF
During operation →
output stop
Output stop →
During operation
108
Disallowed →
disallowed
Disallowed →
disallowed
Disallowed →
disallowed
Disallowed →
disallowed
Allowed
Disallowed
Disallowed
Disallowed
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. If the MRS signal is on, the operation mode cannot be switched to the PU
operation mode when the start signal (STF, STR) is on.
2. The operation mode switches to the external operation mode independently
of whether the start signal (STF, STR) is on or off.
Therefore, the motor is run in the external operation mode when the MRS
signal is switched off with either of STF and STR on.
3. When the protective function (major fault) is activated, the inverter can be
STOP
reset by pressing the RESET
key of the control panel.
4. Switching the MRS signal on and rewriting the Pr. 79 value to other than "7"
in the PU operation mode causes the MRS signal to provide the ordinary
MRS function (output stop). Also as soon as "7" is set in Pr. 79, the
operation mode is switched to PU operation mode.
(3) Operation mode switching by external signal
1) Preparation
Set "8" (switching to other than external operation mode) in Pr. 79.
Use any of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection) to set the terminal
used for X16 signal input.
Refer to page 148 for Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection).
Note:
When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 183, the other
functions may be affected.
Check the functions of the corresponding terminals before making settings.
2) Function
When the X16 signal is switched on in the PU operation mode, the operation mode
is forcibly changed to the external operation mode. When the X16 signal is switched
off in the external operation mode, the operation mode is changed to the PU
operation mode. When the X16 signal is switched off during network operation such
as computer link, the operation mode is changed to the PU operation mode as soon
as the switch-over command to the external operation mode is sent from the
computer. Note that this switch-over may only be made while the inverter is at a stop
and cannot be made during operation.
X16 Signal
ON
OFF
Operation Mode
External operation mode (cannot be changed to the PU operation mode)
PU operation mode (cannot be changed to the external operation mode)
109
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.34 General-purpose magnetic flux vector control selection (Pr. 80)
Related parameters
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"
Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency"
Pr. 96 "auto-tuning setting/status"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
You can set the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control.
" General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Provides large starting torque and sufficient low-speed torque.
If the motor constants vary slightly, stable, large low-speed torque is provided
without specific motor constant setting or tuning.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting Range
Remarks
80
9999
0.2kW to 7.5kW,
9999
9999: V/F control
If any of the following conditions are not satisfied, faults such as torque shortage and
speed fluctuation may occur. In this case, select V/F control.
<Operating conditions>
! The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
! The number of motor poles is any of 2, 4, and 6. (4 poles only for the constanttorque motor)
! Single-motor operation (one motor for one inverter) is performed.
! The wiring length between the inverter and motor is within 30m. (If the length is over
30m, perform offline auto tuning with the cables wired.)
<Setting>
(1) General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
! The general-purpose magnetic flux vector control can be selected by setting the
capacity of the motor used in Pr. 80.
Parameter
Number
Setting
9999
80
0.2 to 7.5
Description
V/F control
Set the motor capacity applied.
Generalpurpose
magnetic flux
vector control
! When using Mitsubishi's constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA), set "1" in Pr. 71. (When
using the SF-JRC, perform the offline auto tuning.)
110
PARAMETERS
"" Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96)
4.2.35 Offline auto tuning function (Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96)
Related parameters
Pr. 82 "motor exciting current"
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 9 "electronic thermal O/L
relay"
Pr. 71 "applied motor"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 80 "motor capacity"
Pr. 83 "rated motor voltage"
Pr. 84 "rated motor frequency"
Pr. 90 "motor constant (R1)"
Pr. 96 "auto-tuning setting/status"
What is auto tuning?
(1)The general-purpose magnetic flux vector control system gets the best
performance from the motor for operation.
(2)Using the offline auto tuning function to improve the operational performance of
the motor.
When you use the general-purpose magnetic flux vector control, you can perform the
offline auto tuning operation to calculate the motor constants automatically.
" Offline auto tuning is made valid only when Pr. 80 is set to other than "9999" to
select the general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
" The Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR0.4kW or more) or Mitsubishi constant-torque
motor (By SF-JRCA 200V class and 4-pole motor of 0.4kW to 7.5kW) allows
general-purpose magnetic flux vector control operation to be performed without
using the offline auto tuning function. However, if any other motor (Motor made of
the other manufacturers or SF-JRC, etc.) is used or the wiring distance is long, using
the offline auto tuning function allows the motor to be operated with the optimum
operational characteristics.
" Offline auto tuning
Automatically measures the motor constants used for general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control.
! Offline auto tuning can be performed with the load connected. (As the load is
smaller, tuning accuracy is higher. Tuning accuracy does not change if inertia is
large.)
! The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the control panel
(FR-PA02-02) or PU (FR-PU04).
! Offline auto tuning is available only when the motor is at a stop.
" Tuning data (motor constants) can be copied to another inverter with the PU
(FR-PU04).
! You can read, write and copy the motor constants tuned by the offline auto tuning.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting Range
Remarks
82
9999
0 to 500A,
9999
9999: Mitsubishi standard motor
83
200V/400V
0 to 1000V
Rated inverter voltage
84
90
96
50Hz
9999
0
50 to 120Hz
0 to 50Ω, 9999 9999: Mitsubishi standard motor
0, 1
0: No tuning
111
4
PARAMETERS
<Operating conditions>
!
!
!
!
The motor is connected.
The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
Special motors such as high-slip motors and high-speed motors cannot be tuned.
The motor may move slightly. Therefore, fix the motor securely with a mechanical
brake, or before tuning, make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the
motor runs.
*This instruction must be followed especially for vertical lift applications.
If the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected.
! Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is started when a reactor or
surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) is connected between the inverter and
motor. Remove it before starting tuning.
<Setting>
(1) Parameter setting
! Set the motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 and select the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control.
! Refer to the parameter details list and set the following parameters:
1) Set "1" in Pr. 96.
2) Set the rated motor current (A) in Pr. 9.
3) Set the rated motor voltage (V) in Pr. 83.
4) Set the rated motor frequency (Hz) in Pr. 84.
5) Select the motor using Pr. 71.
! Standard motor .................................................................. Pr. 71 = "3" or "103"
! Constant-torque motor....................................................... Pr. 71 = "13" or "113"
! Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4 poles (1.5kW or less). Pr. 71 = "23" or "123"
Note:
Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 are only displayed when the general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control is selected.
In these parameters, set the values given on the motor plate. Set 200V/60Hz
or 400V/60Hz if the standard or other motor has more than one rated value.
After tuning is over, set the Pr. 9 "electronic overcurrent protection" value to
the rated current at the operating voltage/frequency.
112
PARAMETERS
( Parameter details
Parameter
Number
9
71 (Note)
83
84
90
96
Note:
Setting
Description
0 to 500A
0, 100
Set the rated motor current (A).
Thermal characteristics suitable for standard motor
Thermal characteristics suitable for Mitsubishi's constant1, 101
torque motor
3, 103
Standard motor
13, 113
Constant-torque motor
Select "offline auto
tuning setting"
Mitsubishi's SF-JR4P standard motor
23, 123
(1.5kW or less)
5, 105
Standard motor
Star connection Direct input of
15, 115
Constant-torque motor
motor constants
6, 106
Standard motor
Delta connection enabled
16, 116
Constant-torque motor
0 to 1000V
Set the rated motor voltage (V).
50 to 120Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
Tuning data
0 to 50Ω, 9999
(Values measured by offline auto tuning are set automatically.)
0
Offline auto tuning is not performed.
1
Offline auto tuning is performed.
The electronic overcurrent protection characteristics are also selected
simultaneously. By setting any of "100 to 123", the electronic overcurrent
protection changes to the thermal characteristic of the constant-torque motor
when the RT signal switches on.
(2) Tuning execution
! For PU operation or combined operation 2, press the FWD or REV key.
! For external operation or combined operation 1, switch on the run command.
Note: 1. To force tuning to end
STOP
! Switch on the MRS or RES signal or press the RESET
key to end.
! Switch off the tuning start command to make a forced end.
2. During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid:
! Input signals
<Valid signals>
MRS, RES, STF, STR
! Output signals
RUN, AM, A, B, C
3. Special caution should be exercised when a sequence has been designed
to open the mechanical brake with the RUN signal.
113
4
PARAMETERS
(3) Monitoring the offline tuning status
When the parameter unit (FR-PU04) is used, the Pr. 96 value is displayed during
tuning on the main monitor as shown below. When the control panel is used, the same
value as on the PU is only displayed:
! Control panel (FR-PA02-02) display
(For inverter trip)
Displayed
value
1. Setting
2. Tuning in
progress
3. Completion
4. Erroractivated end
1
2
3
9
! Parameter unit (FR-PU04) main monitor
(For inverter trip)
1. Setting
Display
1
STOP PU
2. Tuning in
progress
TUNE
2
STF FWD PU
3. Completion
TUNE
3
COMPLETION
STF STOP PU
4. Erroractivated end
TUNE
ERROR 9
STF STOP PU
! Reference: Offline auto tuning time (factory setting) is about 10 seconds.
(4) Ending the offline auto tuning
1) Confirm the Pr. 96 value.
! Normal end: "3" is displayed.
! Abnormal end: "9", "91", "92" or "93" is displayed.
! Forced end: "8" is displayed.
2) When tuning ended normally
STOP
key. For external
For PU operation or combined operation 2, press the RESET
operation or combined operation 1, switch off the start signal (STF or STR) once.
This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to
the ordinary indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be done.)
3) When tuning was ended due to an error
Offline auto tuning did not end normally. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Reset the inverter and start tuning all over again.
114
PARAMETERS
4) Error display definitions
Error Display
9
Inverter trip
91
92
93
Error Cause
Remedy
Make setting again.
Increase
Current limit (stall prevention) function was
acceleration/deceleration time.
activated.
Set "1" in Pr. 156.
Converter output voltage reached 75% of Check for fluctuation of power
rated value.
supply voltage.
Check the motor wiring and
Calculation error
make setting again.
No connection with motor will result in a calculation (93) error.
5) When tuning was forced to end
An forced end occurs when you forced the tuning to end by pressing the
switching off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning.
In this case, the offline auto tuning has not ended normally.
(The motor constants are not set.)
Reset the inverter and restart the tuning.
STOP
RESET
key or
Note: 1. The R1 motor constant measured during in the offline auto tuning is stored
as a parameter and its data is held until the offline auto tuning is performed
again.
2. An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning
error.
After power is restored, the inverter goes into the ordinary operation mode.
Therefore, when STF (STR) is on, the motor runs in forward (reverse)
rotation.
3. Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note
that if an error retry has been set, retry is ignored.
4. The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.
CAUTION
When the offline auto tuning is used for an elevating machine, e.g. a lifter,
it may drop due to insufficient torque.
115
4
PARAMETERS
<Setting the motor constant as desired>
" To set the motor constant without using the offline auto tuning data
<Operating procedure>
1. Set any of the following values in Pr. 71:
Setting
Standard motor
Constant-torque
motor
Star Connection
Motor
5 or 105
Delta Connection
Motor
6 or 106
15 or 115
16 or 116
By setting any of "105 to 116", the electronic overcurrent protection changes to the
thermal characteristics of the constant-torque motor when the RT signal switches on.
2. Set "801" in Pr. 77.
(Only when the Pr. 80 setting is other than "9999", the parameter values of the
motor exciting current (Pr. 82) and motor constant (Pr. 90) can be displayed.
Though the parameters other than Pr. 82 and Pr. 90 can also be displayed, they
are parameters for manufacturer setting and their values should not be changed.)
3. In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired
values:
Parameter
Number
82
90
Name
Setting Range
Setting
Increments
Factory
Setting
Motor exciting
current
Motor constant
(R1)
0 to 500A,
9999
0.01A
9999
0 to 10Ω, 9999
0.001Ω
9999
4. Return the Pr. 77 setting to the original value.
5. Refer to the following table and set Pr. 84:
Parameter
Number
Name
Setting Range
Setting
Increments
Factory
Setting
84
Rated motor
frequency
50 to 120Hz
0.01Hz
50Hz
Note: 1. The Pr. 90 value may only be read when general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control has been selected.
2. Set "9999" in Pr. 90 to use the standard motor constant (including that for
the constant-torque motor).
3. If "star connection" is mistaken for "delta connection" or vice versa during
setting of Pr. 71, general-purpose magnetic flux vector control cannot be
exercised normally.
116
PARAMETERS
4.2.36 Computer link operation (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 338 to Pr. 340, Pr. 342)
Pr. 117 "station number"
Pr. 118 "communication speed"
Pr. 119 "stop bit length"
Pr. 120 "parity check presence/absence"
Pr. 121 "number of communication retries"
Pr. 122 "communication check time interval"
Pr. 123 "waiting time setting"
Pr. 124 "CR•LF presence/absence selection"
Pr. 338 "operation command right"
Pr. 339 "speed command right"
Pr. 340 "link start mode selection"
Pr. 342 "E2PROM write selection"
Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and
personal computer.
POINT
<To perform computer link operation>
! Set "100, 101, 110 or 111" in Pr. 119 to make NET mode communication.
! Presetting any value other than "0" in Pr. 122 enables communication between the
computer and inverter.
! When the communication option is fitted, NET mode communication cannot be
used if "100, 101, 110 or 111" is set in Pr. 119.
! When "1" is set in Pr. 340, the inverter is placed in the computer link operation
mode at power-on or inverter reset. (Note that it is overridden by the Pr. 79
"operation mode selection" setting.)
! Refer to page 13 for wiring.
<Operation mode>
1) PU mode communication (Pr. 119 = "0, 1, 10, 11")
Switching by control
panel (FR-PA02-02)/parameter
unit (FR-PU04)
A
PU
operation
External
operation
B
Symbol
A
B
Switching Type
PU operation to
external operation
Switching Method
Using the MODE key of the control panel (FR-PA02-02)
or PU / EXT key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04)
External operation
to PU operation
Using the MODE key of the control panel (FR-PA02-02)
or PU / EXT key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04)
117
4
PARAMETERS
2) NET mode communication (Pr. 119 = "100, 101, 110, 111")
Switching by
computer
program
Switching by control
panel (FR-PA02-02)/parameter
unit (FR-PU04)
C
A
Computer
link
operation
(NET mode
communication)
External
operation
PU
operation
B
D
E
(Switching must
not be made)
Symbol
A
B
C
D
E *1
F
*1
F
Switching Type
PU operation to
external operation
Switching Method
Using the
key of the control panel (FR-PA02-02) or
PU / EXT key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04)
External operation to
PU operation
External operation to
computer link operation
(NET mode
communication)
Computer link
operation (NET mode
communication) to
external operation
PU operation to
computer link operation
(NET mode
communication)
Computer link
operation (NET mode
communication) to PU
operation
Using the MODE key of the control panel (FR-PA02-02) or
PU / EXT key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04)
MODE
Using the computer program
Using the computer program
Switching must not be made
(External operation may be selected at
switched to computer link operation at C *2)
A
and then
Switching must not be made
(External operation may be selected at
switched to PU operation at B *2)
D
and then
*1. In the switch-over mode (Pr. 79 = 6), switching in E and F is allowed.
*2. When "1" is set in Pr. 340 "link start mode selection", the inverter is placed in the
computer link operation mode at power-on or inverter reset. (Note that it is
overridden by the Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" setting.)
118
PARAMETERS
<Link start mode>
The operation mode at power on and at restoration from instantaneous power failure
can be selected.
To choose the NET mode communication, set "1" in Pr. 340.
Pr. 340
Setting
Pr. 79
0
1
2
3
0
(Factory
Setting)
1
4
6
Operation Mode
PU or external
operation
PU operation
External operation
External/PU
combined operation
mode
External/PU
combined operation
mode
Switch-over mode
7
External operation
mode
8
External/PU
combined operation
mode
NET mode communication
Mode at Power On or at Restoration
from Instantaneous Power Failure
Inverter goes into the external operation mode.
Inverter goes into the PU operation mode.
Inverter goes into the external operation mode.
Running frequency is set in the PU operation
mode and the start signal is set in the external
operation mode.
Running frequency is set in the external operation
mode and the start signal is set in the PU
operation mode.
Operation mode is switched while running.
MRS signal ON ....Shift to the PU operation mode
enabled (output stopped during
external operation)
MRS signal OFF ..Shift to the PU operation mode
inhibited
X16 signal ON .....Shift to external operation mode
X16 signal OFF....Shift to PU operation mode
Inverter goes into the NET mode communication
mode. (Program need not be used for switching)
1) The Pr. 340 value may be changed in any operation mode.
2) When Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = "0, 2 or 6", "1" in Pr. 340 is made valid.
4
119
PARAMETERS
<Control location selection>
In the computer link operation mode, operation can be performed by signals from
external terminals in accordance with the settings of Pr. 338 "operation command right"
and Pr. 339 "speed command right".
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 settings
Selective functions
Operation command
Control
right (Pr. 338)
location
selection Speed command right
(Pr. 339)
Forward rotation
command (STF)
Fixed
Reverse rotation
functions command (STR)
(Functions Reset (RES)
equivalent
Computer link operation
to
terminals) frequency
2
4
Low-speed operation
0
command (RL)
Middle-speed operation
1
command (RM)
High-speed operation
2
command (RH)
Second function
3
selection (RT)
Current input selection
4
(AU)
Start self-holding
5
selection (STOP)
6 Output halt (MRS)
External thermal relay
7
input (OH)
15-speed selection
8
(REX)
PU operation-external
16 operation switching
(X16)
Magnetic flux-V/F
18
switching (X18)
RH, RM,
RL
Remote setting
selection (RH, RM, RH)
functions
External
Computer
Both

Note:
0: Computer 0: Computer 1: External 1: External
Remarks
0: Computer 1: External 0: Computer 1: External
Computer
Computer
External
External
Computer
Computer
External
External
Both
Both
Both
Both
Computer

Computer



External
External


External
External
Computer
External
Computer
External
Pr. 59 = 0
Computer
External
Computer
External
Pr. 59 = 0
Computer
External
Computer
External
Pr. 59 = 0
Computer
Computer
External
External

Both

Both


External
External
Both
Both
External
External
External
External
External
External
Computer
External
Computer
External
External
External
External
External
Computer
Computer
External
External
Computer
External
Computer
External
(Note)
Pr. 59 = 0
Pr. 59
= 1, 2
: Only control by signal from external terminal is valid.
: Only control from sequence program is valid.
: Only control from both external terminal and computer is valid.
: Control from both external terminal and computer is invalid.
When "7" is set in Pr. 79 (when the PU operation interlock function is
selected), only operation from external terminal is valid independently of the
Pr. 338 and Pr. 339 settings.
120
PARAMETERS
" The motor can be run from the PU connector of the inverter using RS-485
communication.
Communication specifications
Communication
specifications
Conforming standard
Number of inverters connected
Communication speed
Control protocol
Communication method
Character system
Stop bit length
Terminator
Parity check
Check
system
Sum check
Waiting time setting
RS-485
1:N (maximum 32 inverters)
Selectable between 19200, 9600 and 4800bps
Asynchronous
Half-duplex
ASCII (7 bits/8 bits) selectable
Selectable between 1 bit and 2 bits.
CR/LF (presence/absence selectable)
Selectable between presence (even/odd) and absence
Present
Selectable between presence and absence
" For the data codes of the parameters, refer to Appendix 1 "Data Code List"
(page 192).
REMARKS
For computer link operation, set 65520 (HFFF0) as the value "8888" and 65535
(HFFFF) as the value "9999".
Parameter Number
117
118
Factory Setting
0
192
119*1
1
120
121
122*2
123
124
338
339
340
342
2
1
9999
9999
1
0
0
0
0
Setting Range
0 to 31
48, 96, 192
Data length 8
0, 1, 100, 101*3
Data length 7
10, 11, 110, 111*3
0, 1, 2
0 to 10, 9999
0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999
0 to 150, 9999
0, 1, 2
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1
*1. When you have performed parameter copy, set the parameters again
after copying.
*2. When making communication, set any value other than 0 in Pr. 122
"communication check time interval".
*3. "100, 101, 110 and 111" are not displayed as the setting range on the
FR-PU04 parameter unit.
121
4
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, the
communication specifications must be set to the inverter initially. If initial setting is not
made or there is a setting fault, data transfer cannot be made.
Note: After making the initial setting of the parameters, always reset the inverter.
After you have changed the communication-related parameters,
communication cannot be made unit the inverter is reset.
Parameter
Number
Definition
117
Station
number
118
Communication speed
119*1
120
Stop bit
length
Parity check
presence/
absence
Setting
0 to 31
48
96
192
0
8 data 1
bits 100
101
10
11
7 bits
110
111
0
1
2
0 to 10
121
Number of
communication retries
9999
(65535)
0
122
Communication check
0.1 to 999.8
time interval
9999
123
Waiting time
setting
0 to 150
9999
Description
Station number specified for communication from the
PU connector.
Set the inverter station numbers when two or more
inverters are connected to one personal computer.
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
Stop bit length 1 bit
Communication operation
Stop bit length 2 bits
Stop bit length 1 bit
Communication operation
(NET mode communication) Stop bit length 2 bits
Stop bit length 1 bit
Communication operation
Stop bit length 2 bits
Stop bit length 1 bit
Communication operation
(NET mode communication) Stop bit length 2 bits
Absent
Odd parity present
Even parity present
Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of
a data receive error.
If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the
permissible value, the inverter will come to an alarm
stop.
If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not
come to an alarm stop. At this time, the inverter can
be coasted to a stop by MRS or RESET input.
During a communication error (H0 to H5), the minor
fault signal (LF) is switched on. Allocate the used
terminal with any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (multi-function
outputs).
No communication
Set the communication check time [seconds] interval.
If a no-communication state persists for longer than
the permissible time, the inverter will come to an
alarm stop.
Communication check suspension
Set the waiting time between data transmission to the
inverter and response.
Set with communication data.
122
PARAMETERS
Parameter
Number
124
338*2
339*2
Definition
Setting
CR•LF
instruction
presence/
absence
Operation
command
right
Speed
command
right
Data Definition
0
Without CR/LF
1
With CR, without LF
2
With CR/LF
0
Computer
1
External
0
Computer
1
External
Depends on Pr. 79 setting
NET mode communication (note that automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure is disabled.)
When parameter write is performed from the
computer, parameters are written to E2PROM.
When parameter write is performed from the
computer, parameters are written to RAM.
Link start
mode
selection
0
340*2
0
342*3
E2PROM
write
selection
1
1
*1. When the communication option is fitted, NET mode communication cannot be used if "100, 101, 110 or
111" is set in Pr. 119.
*2. Made valid when "100, 101, 110 or 111" is set in Pr. 119.
*3. When you have set write to RAM, powering off the inverter clears the parameter values that have been
changed. Therefore
the parameter values available when power is switched on again are those stored
2
previously in E PROM.
When the parameter
values will be changed frequently, set "1" in Pr. 342 to choose write to RAM.
2
The Pr. 342 " E PROM write selection" setting is also valid when the communication option is fitted.
<Computer programming>
(1) Communication protocol
Data communication between the computer and inverter is performed using the
following procedure:
Data read
Computer
↓ (Data flow)
Inverter
Inverter
↓ (Data flow)
Computer
*2
1)
4)
2)
3)
5)
Time
*1
Data write
*1. If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, execute retry operation with the user
program. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive retries
exceeds the parameter setting.
*2. On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns "reply data 3)" to the computer
again. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive data errors
reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.
123
4
PARAMETERS
(2) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types
Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows:
No.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Operation
Communication request is sent
to the inverter in accordance
with the user program in the
computer.
Inverter data processing time
Reply data No error*
from the
(Request
inverter
(Data 1) is accepted)
checked for With error
(request rejected)
error.
Computer processing delay
time
Answer from No error*
computer in
(No inverter
response to
processing)
reply data 3).
With error
(Data 3) is
(Inverter outputs
checked for
3) again)
error)
Run
Running Parameter
Write
Command Frequency
Inverter
Reset
A
(A")
Note1
A
A'
Present Present
A
(A")
Note2
Present
Monitor- Parameing
ter Read
B
B
Absent Present Present
E,E'
E
(E")
(E")
Absent
Note1 Note2
C
C
C
D
D
D
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
G
G
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
H
H
F
F
Absent Absent
* In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, 10ms or more is also required after
"no data error (ACK)". (Refer to page 126.)
Note: 1. Setting any of "0.01 to 9998" in Pr. 37 "speed display" and "1" in data code
"HFF" changes the data format to A" or E", the output frequency to the speed
indication, and the unit to 0.001r/min. If the data code FF is not 1, the unit is
1r/min and the 4-digit data format can be used.
2. The read/write data format of Pr. 37 "speed display" is always E"/A".
"
(3) Data format
Data used is hexadecimal.
Data is automatically transferred in ASCII between the computer and inverter.
1) Data format types
(1) Communication request data from computer to inverter
Inverter
station Instruction
ENQ number
code
*3
2
3
Format A"
2
4
6
3
5
*3 Inverter Instruction
ENQ station
code
number
1
6
Instruction
code
*3
station
ENQ
1
5
number
Inverter
Format A'
4
Waiting
time *5
1
2
3
4
5
6
Sum
check
Data
7
8
Data
7
8
Waiting
time
Format A
Waiting
time
[Data write]
9
10 11 12 13←Number of characters
Sum
check
9
8
9
*4
10 11←Number of characters
Data
7
*4
Sum
check
*4
10 11 12 13 14 15←Number of characters
Format B
number
Instruction
code
Waiting
time *5
[Data read]
2
4
6
Inverter
*3 station
ENQ
1
3
5
Sum *4
check
7
8
9 ←Number of characters
124
PARAMETERS
Note: 1. The inverter station numbers may be set between H00 and H1F (stations 0
and 31) in hexadecimal.
2. *3 indicates the control code.
3. *4 indicates the CR or LF code.
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR
(carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data
group on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the
inverter according to the computer.
Also, the presence and absence of the CR and LF codes can be selected
using Pr. 124.
4. At *5, when Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" ≠ 9999, create the communication
request data without "waiting time" in the data format.
(The number of characters is decremented by 1.)
2) Reply data from inverter to computer during data write
[No data error detected]
[Data error detected]
Inverter
Format C
*3
station *4
ACK number
1
2
3
*3 Inverter Error
*4
station
NAK number code
Format D
4←Number of characters
1
2
3
4
5 ←Number of characters
3) Reply data from inverter to computer during data read
[No data error detected]
Format E
1
Format E'
2
3
Inverter
*3
station
STX number
1
Format E"
[Data error detected]
Inverter
*3
station
STX number
2
3
Read
data
4
5
Read
data
4
5
Inverter
*3
station
STX number
1
2
3
6
*3
ETX
6
*3
ETX
7
Sum
check
8
9
Sum
check
*4
7
9
8
5
6
7
*3 station Error
*4
NAK number code
1
*3
ETX
8
Format F
10 11
Inverter
Read
data
4
*4
9
Sum
check
2
3
4
5
*4
10 11 12 13
4) Send data from computer to inverter during data read
Inverter
Inverter
Format G
*3 station
ACK number
1
2
4
[Data error detected]
[No data error detected]
3
*4
Format H
4←Number of characters
125
*3
station
NAK number
1
2
3
*4
4←Number of characters
PARAMETERS
(4) Data definitions
1) Control codes
Signal
STX
ETX
ENQ
ACK
LF
CR
NAK
ASCII Code
H02
H03
H05
H06
H0A
H0D
H15
Description
Start of Text (Start of data)
End of Text (End of data)
Enquiry (Communication request)
Acknowledge (No data error detected)
Line Feed
Carriage Return
Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)
2) Inverter station number
Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.
3) Instruction code
Specify the processing request, e.g. operation, monitoring, given by the computer to
the inverter. Hence, the inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by
specifying the instruction code as appropriate. (Refer to page 192.)
4) Data
Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the
inverter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with
the instruction codes. (Refer to page 192.)
5) Waiting time
Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter from the
computer and the transmission of reply data. Set the waiting time in accordance with
the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in 10ms increments
(e.g. 1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms).
Computer
↓
Inverter
Inverter
↓
Computer
Inverter data processing time
= waiting time + data check time
(setting×10ms) (12ms)
Note: If the Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" value is not 9999, create the communication
request data with no "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters
is decremented by 1.)
6) Response time
Data sending time (refer to the following calculation expression)
Inverter data processing time = waiting time + data check time
(set value 10ms)
(12ms)
Computer
Inverter
Inverter
Computer
STX
ACK
ENQ
10ms or
more required
10ms or
more required
Data sending time (refer to the following calculation expression)
Data sending time (refer to the following calculation expression)
Inverter data processing time = waiting time + data check time
(set value 10ms)
(12ms)
Computer
Inverter
Inverter
Computer
ENQ
10ms or
more required
Data sending time (refer to the following calculation expression)
126
PARAMETERS
[Data sending time calculation expression]
Communication
Number of data
1
Data sending
specification
×
×
=
characters
Communication speed
(Total number of bits)
time (s)
(Refer to page 124)
(bps)
(See below)
" Communication specification
Name
Stop bit length
Data length
Parity check
Yes
No
Number of Bits
1 bit
2 bits
7 bits
8 bits
1 bit
0 bits
(Example 1)
Computer → inverter
ASCII code →
E
N
Q
H05
Station
number
Instruction
code
Waiting
time
In addition to the bits in the above table, 1 bit is required for the start bit.
Minimum total number of bits ... 9 bits
Maximum total number of bits ... 12 bits
7) Sum check code
The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte
(8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from the checked ASCII data.
Sum
check
code
Data
1
0
1
E 1
0
7
A D F
4 ←Binary
H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34
code
H H H H
H
H
H H
H
30 + 31 + 45 + 31 + 31 + 30 + 37 + 41 + 44
H
=1F4
Sum
(Example 2)
inverter → Computer
ASCII code →
S
T
X
H02
Station
number
Read time
E
T
X
Sum
check
code
0
1
1
7
7
0
3
0
H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30
←Binary code
H H H
H H
H
30 + 31 + 31 + 37 + 37 + 30
H
=130
Sum
4
127
PARAMETERS
8) Error code
If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to
the computer together with the NAK code. (Refer to page 132.)
Note: 1. When the data from the computer has an error, the inverter will not accept
that data.
2. Any data communication, e.g. run command, monitoring, is started when the
computer gives a communication request. Without the computer's command,
the inverter does not return any data. For monitoring, therefore, design the
program to cause the computer to provide a data read request as required.
3. When accessing the parameter settings, data for link parameter expansion
setting differs between the parameters as indicated below:
Read
Link
parameter
expansion
setting
Write
Instruction
Data
Code
H7F
H00: Pr. 0 to Pr. 96 values are accessible.
H01: Pr. 100 to Pr. 158 and Pr. 901 to Pr. 905
values are accessible.
H02: Pr. 160 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 254
values are accessible.
HFF
H03: Pr. 338 to Pr. 348 values are accessible.
H05: Pr. 500 to Pr. 502 values are accessible.
H09: Pr. 990, Pr. 991 values are accessible.
CAUTION
When the inverter's permissible communication time interval is not set,
interlocks are provided to disable operation to prevent hazardous
conditions. Always set the communication check time interval before
starting operation.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once
when the computer provides a communication request. If communication
is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc, the inverter
cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has
elapsed, the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E.PUE). (E. OPT) appears
during NET mode communication.
The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or
by switching power off.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault
etc, the inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.
128
PARAMETERS
<Setting items and set data>
After completion of parameter settings, set the instruction codes and data then start
communication from the computer to allow various types of operation control and
monitoring.
Item
No.
2
Read
H7B
Write
HFB
Operation
mode
Output
frequency
[speed]
H6F
Output current
H70
Output voltage
H71
Monitoring
1
Instruction
Code
Number of
Data Digits
Description
(Data code
FF=1)
H0001: External operation
PU mode
H0002: Communication
Communication
operation
H0000: Computer link operation
NET mode
H0001: External operation
Communication
H0002: PU operation
4 digits
H0001: External operation
PU mode
H0002: Communication
Communication
operation
NET mode
H0000: Computer link operation
Communication H0001: External operation
H0000 to HFFFF:Output frequency
(hexadecimal) in 0.01Hz
4 digits
increments
[Speed (hexadecimal) in
(6 digits)
r/min increments if Pr. 37 =
1 to 9998]
H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal)
4 digits
in 0.01A increments
H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage
(hexadecimal) in 0.1V
4 digits
increments
H0000 to HFFFF: Two most recent alarm
definitions
Alarm definition display
example (instruction code
H74)
b15
b0
b8b7
0011000010100000
Previous alarm Most recent alarm
(H30)
(HA0)
Alarm
definition
H74 to
H77
4
Alarm data
Datza
H00
H10
H11
H12
H20
H21
H22
H30
H31
H40
H60
Description
No alarm
OC1
OC2
OC3
OV1
OV2
OV3
THT
THM
FIN
OLT
129
Data
H70
H80
H81
H90
HA0
HB0
HB1
HB2
HF3
HF6
HF7
Description
BE
GF
LF
OHT
OPT
PE
PUE
RET
E. 3
E. 6
E. 7
4 digits
PARAMETERS
No.
Item
Instruction
Code
Description
b7
0 0
(Data code
FF=1)
b0 b0 : Current input selection (AU)
0 b1 : Forward rotation (STF)
0 0 0 0 1
[For example 1]
[Example 1] H02 ... Forward
rotation
[Example 2] H00 ... Stop
3 Run command
Number of
Data Digits
HFA
b2 : Reverse rotation (STR)
b3 : Low-speed (RL)
b4 : Middle-speed (RM)
b5 : High-speed (RH)
b6 : Second function selection (RT)
b7 : Output shut-off (MRS)
2 digits
*You can assign terminal functions using Pr.
180 to Pr. 183. (Refer to page 148)
(Note) You can set b0 and b3 to b7 for NET
mode communication (Pr. 119 = "100,
101, 110 or 111") only.
b7
0 0
4
Inverter status
monitor
Set frequency
read (E2PROM)
Set frequency
read (RAM)
5 Set frequency
write
(E2PROM)
Set frequency
write (RAM)
H7A
H6E
H6D
HEE
HED
6 Inverter reset
HFD
Alarm definition
7 batch clear
HF4
b0
0
b0: Inverter running (RUN)
b1: Forward rotation
b2: Reverse rotation
(For example 1)
b3: Up to frequency (SU)
[Example 1] H02 ... During forward b4: Overload (OL)
rotation
b5:
[Example 2] H80 ... Stop due to
b6: Frequency detection (FU)
alarm
b7: Alarm occurrence
0
0
0
0
1
Reads the set frequency (RAM or E2PROM).
H0000 to H9C40: 0.01Hz increments
(hexadecimal)
H0000 to H9C40: 0.01Hz increments
(hexadecimal)
(0 to 400.00Hz)
To change the set frequency consecutively,
write data to the inverter RAM. (Instruction
code: HED)
H9696: Resets the inverter.
As the inverter is reset on start of communication by the computer, the inverter cannot send
reply data back to the computer.
H9696: Batch clear of alarm history
2 digits
4 digits
(6 digits)
4 digits
(6 digits)
4 digits
4 digits
All parameters return to the factory settings.
Any of four different all clear operations is
performed according to the data.
Pr. CommuCalibranication
tion
Data
Pr.
All parameter
8
clear
HFC
Other
Pr.*
HEC
HFF
'
×
'
'
H9696
'
'
'
'
H9966
×
×
'
'
H5A5A
×
'
'
'
H55AA
When all parameter clear is executed for
H9696 or H9966, communication-related
parameter settings also return to the factory
settings. When resuming operation, set the
parameters again.
* Pr. 75 is not cleared.
130
4 digits
PARAMETERS
No.
Instruction
Code
Item
Description
Number of
Data Digits
(Data code
FF=1)
9 Parameter write
10 Parameter read
Read
Link
parameter
11
expansion
setting
Write
Second
parameter Read
12 changing
(Code
Write
HFF=1)
H80 to
HFD
H00 to
H7B
H7F
HFF
H6C
HEC
Refer to the "Data Code List" (page 192) and
write and/or read the values as required.
H00 to H6C and H80 to HEC parameter values
are changed.
H00: Pr. 0 to Pr. 96 values are accessible.
H01: Pr. 117 to Pr. 158 and Pr. 901 to Pr. 905
values are accessible.
H02: Pr. 160 to Pr. 192 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 254
values are accessible.
H03: Pr. 338 to Pr. 340 values are accessible.
(When "100, 101, 110 or 111" is set in
Pr. 119 or when the communication
option is fitted), Pr. 342 value is
accessible, Pr. 345 to Pr. 348 values are
accessible (fitted with FR-E5ND).
H05: Pr. 500 to Pr. 502 values are accessible.
(fitted with communication option)
H09: Pr. 990 and Pr. 991 values are
accessible.
When setting the bias/gain (data codes H5E to
H61, HDE to HE1) parameters
H00: Offset/gain
H01: Analog
H02: Analog value of terminal
4 digits
2 digits
2 digits
REMARKS
For the instruction codes HFF, HEC, their set values are held once they are written,
but changed to 0 when the inverter is reset or all clear is performed.
4
131
PARAMETERS
"
<Error Code List>
The corresponding error code in the following list is displayed if an error is detected in
any communication request data from the computer:
Error
Code
Item
H0
Computer NAK
error
H1
Parity error
H2
Sum check error
H3
Protocol error
H4
Framing error
H5
Overrun error
H6
H7
H8
H9
HA
HB
HC
HD
HE
HF

Definition
The number of errors consecutively
detected in communication request data
from the computer is greater than allowed
number of retries.
The parity check result does not match the
specified parity.
The sum check code in the computer does
not match that of the data received by the
inverter.
Data received by the inverter is in wrong
protocol, data receive is not completed
within given time, or CR and LF are not as
set in the parameter.
The stop bit length is not as specified by
initialization.
New data has been sent by the computer
before the inverter completes receiving the
preceding data.

Inverter Operation
Brought to an alarm
stop (E.PUE
(E. OPT appears
during NET mode
communication.) if
error occurs
continuously more
than the allowable
number of retries.

Does not accept
The character received is invalid (other received data but is
Character error
than 0 to 9, A to F, control code).
not brought to alarm
stop.






Parameter write was attempted in other
Mode error
than the computer link operation mode or
Does not accept
during inverter operation.
received data but is
Instruction code
The specified command does not exist.
not brought to alarm
error
stop.
Invalid data has been specified for
Data range error
parameter write, frequency setting, etc.









132
PARAMETERS
(5) Communication specifications for RS-485 communication
Operation Mode
Operation
Location
Computer user
program via PU
connector
(When "0, 1, 10
or 11" is set in
Pr. 119)
PU operation
External
operation
Computer link
operation
(for NET mode
communication)
Run command
(start)
Enabled
Disable
Disabled
Running
frequency setting
Enabled
Item
Monitoring
Parameter write
Parameter read
Inverter reset
Stop command
Computer user
Run command
program via PU Running
connector
frequency setting
(When "100, 101, Monitoring
110 or 111" is set Parameter write
in Pr. 119)
Parameter read
Inverter reset
Stop command
Control circuit
Inverter reset
external terminal Run command
Running
frequency setting
Enabled
Enabled (*4)
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
(Combined
operation mode)
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled (*3)
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled (*3)
Enabled (*1)
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled (*1)
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled (*4)
Enabled
Enabled (*2)
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled (*1)
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled (*1)
Disabled
*1. As set in Pr. 338 "operation command write" and Pr. 339 "speed command write".
(Refer to page 120)
*2. At occurrence of RS-485 communication error, the inverter cannot be reset from the
computer.
*3. As set in Pr. 75 "reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection".
*4. As set in Pr. 77 "parameter write disable selection".
(6) Operation at alarm occurrence
Operation Mode
Communication
Communication
Fault Location
Description
External Link Operation
Operation
Operation (for NET mode
(PU connector)
communication)
Inverter operation
Stop
Stop
Stop
Inverter fault
Communication PU connector
Continued
Continued
Continued
Communication
Stop/continued
Stop/continued
Inverter operation
Continued
error
(*3)
(*3)
(Communication
from PU
Communication PU connector
Stop
Stop
Stop
connector)
*3: Can be selected using the corresponding parameter (factory-set to stop).
(7) Communication error
Fault Location
Communication error
(Error in Communication from PU
connector)
Error Message
Not displayed
133
Remarks
Error code is E.PUE (E. OPT appears
during NET mode communication.)
4
PARAMETERS
"" PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)
4.2.37 PID control (Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)
Related parameters
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input
terminal function selection)
Pr. 191 to Pr. 192 (output
terminal function selection)
Pr. 902 to Pr. 905 (frequency
setting voltage (current)
biases and gains)
Pr. 128 "PID action selection"
Pr. 129 "PID proportional band"
Pr. 130 "PID integral time"
Pr. 131 "upper limit"
Pr. 132 "lower limit"
Pr. 133 "PID action set point for PU operation"
Pr. 134 "PID differential time"
The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or
pressure.
! The voltage input signal (0 to ±5V or 0 to ±10V) or Pr. 133 setting is used as a set
point and the 4 to 20mA DC current input signal used as a feedback value to
constitute a feedback system for PID control.
Parameter
Number
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
Factory
Setting
0
100%
1s
9999
9999
0%
9999
Setting Range
Remarks
0, 20, 21
0.1 to 1000%, 9999
0.1 to 3600s, 9999
0 to 100%, 9999
0 to 100%, 9999
0 to 100%
0.01 to 10.00s, 9999
9999: No proportional control
9999: No integral control
9999: Function invalid
9999: Function invalid
9999: No differential control
<Setting>
(1) Basic PID control configuration
Inverter circuit :
Pr. 133 or Treminal 2
Set point
PID operation
+-
1
Kp 1+ Ti S +Td S
Motor
Manipulated
variable
IM
Terminal 4
Feedback signal (Process value)
Kp: Proportion constant
Ti: Integral time
134
S: Operator
Td: Differential time
PARAMETERS
(2) PID action overview
1) PI action
A combination of proportional control action (P) and integral control action (I) for
providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation and changes with time.
[Operation example for stepped changes of process value]
Note: PI action is the sum of P and I
Deviation
actions.
P action
Set point
Process value
Time
I action
Time
PI action
Time
2) PD action
A combination of proportional control action (P) and differential control action (D)
for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation speed to improve the
transient characteristic.
[Operation example for proportional changes of process value]
Note: PD action is the sum of P and D
Set
point
actions.
P action
Process
value
D action
PD action
Deviation
Time
Time
Time
3) PID action
The PI action and PD action are combined to utilize the advantages of both
actions for control.
Note: The PID action is the sum of the
Set point
P, I and D actions.
Deviation
Process
value
P action
I action
D action
Time
Time
Time
y=at 2 +bt+c
PID action
135
Time
4
PARAMETERS
4) Reverse action
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point process value) is positive, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is
negative.
Deviation
Set point
[Heating]
Set point
X>0
X<0
+
Cold
up
Hot
down
Process value
-
Feedback signal
(Process value)
5) Forward action
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point process value) is negative, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is
positive.
Process value
[Cooling]
Set point
X>0
X<0
+
-
Too cold
Hot
Set point
down
up
Feedback signal
(Process value)
Deviation
Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency)
Deviation
Positive
Negative
Reverse
action
Forward
action
)
*
*
)
136
PARAMETERS
(3) Wiring example
Pr. 128 = 20
Pr. 190 = 14
Pr. 191 = 15
Pr. 192 = 16
Inverter
NFB
Power supply
L1
L2
L3
Forward rotation
STF
Reverse rotation
STR
SD
10
Setting potentiometer
(Set point setting)
2
5
4
U
V
W
Motor
Pump
IM
P
For 2-wire
For 3-wire
type
type
(Note 2)
Detector
Upper
limit
SU
Lower limit
RUN
−
+
+ − +
SE Limit signal common
Forward rotation output
A
Reverse rotation output
C
Forward (reverse)
rotation output
signal common
(Process value) 4 to 20mADC
(OUT)
(COM)
(24V)
!
!
!
!
0
24V
DC power
(Note 1)
supply
AC1φ
200/220V 50/60Hz
Note: 1. The power supply must be selected in accordance with the power
specifications of the detector used.
2. The output signal terminals used depends on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 settings.
4
137
PARAMETERS
(4) I/O signals
Input
Signal
2
4
Output
FUP
FDN
RL
Terminal Used
Function
2
Set point input
Description
Enter the set point for PID control.
Enter the 4 to 20mADC process value signal
4
Process value input
from the detector.
Output to indicate that the process value
Upper limit output
signal exceeded the upper limit value.
Output to indicate that the process value
Depending on Lower limit output signal exceeded the lower limit value.
Pr. 190 to
"Hi" is output to indicate that the output
Pr. 192
Forward (reverse)
indication of the parameter unit is forward
rotation direction
rotation (FWD) or "Low" to indicate that it is
output
reverse rotation (REV) or stop (STOP).
" Enter the set point across inverter terminals 2-5 or in Pr. 133 and enter the process
value signal across inverter terminals 4-5. At this time, set "20" or "21" in Pr. 128.
Item
Set point
Process value
Entry
Description
Set 0V as 0% and
When "0" or "10" is set in Pr. 73
5V as 100%.
(5V selected for terminal 2).
Across terminals 2-5
Set 0V as 0% and
When "1" or "11" is set in Pr. 73
10V as 100%.
(10V selected for terminal 2).
Pr. 133
Set the set point (%) in Pr. 133.
Across terminals 4-5 4mA DC is equivalent to 0% and 20mA DC to 100%.
138
PARAMETERS
(5) Parameter setting
Parameter
Number
Setting
0
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
Name
Description
No PID action
For heating, pressure control,
20
PID reverse action
etc.
21
For cooling, etc.
PID forward action
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting
is small), the manipulated variable varies greatly
PID
with a slight change of the process value. Hence, as
0.1 to
the proportional band narrows, the response
propor1000%
sensitivity (gain) improves but the stability
tional
deteriorates, e.g. hunting occurs.
band
Gain K = 1/proportional band
No proportional control
9999
Time required for the integral (I) action to provide
the same manipulated variable as that for the
0.1 to
PID
proportional (P) action. As the integral time
3600 s
integral
decreases, the set point is reached earlier but
time
hunting occurs more easily.
No integral control.
9999
Set the upper limit. If the feedback value exceeds
the setting, the FUP signal is output. (Process value
0 to 100% Upper
of
4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.)
limit
No function
9999
Set the lower limit. If the feedback value falls below
the setting, the FDN signal is output. (Process value
0 to 100% Lower
of 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.)
limit
No
function
9999
Only valid for the PU command in the PU operation
PID
or
PU/external combined operation mode.
action set
For external operation, the voltage across 2-5 is the
0 to 100% point for
set point.
PU
(Pr. 902 value is equivalent to 0% and Pr. 903 value
operation to 100%.)
Time required for the differential (D) action to provide
0.01 to
the same process value as that for the proportional
PID
(P) action. As the differential time increases, greater
10.00 s
differential response is made to the deviation change.
time
No differential control.
9999
PID
action
selection
(6) Adjustment procedure
Parameter setting
Terminal setting
Adjust the PID control parameters, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134.
Set the output terminal functions, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192.
Run
139
4
PARAMETERS
(7) Calibration example
(A detector of 4mA at 0°C and 20mA at 50°C is used to adjust the room temperature to
25°C under PID control. The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0-5V).)
START
Convert the set point into %.
Calculate the ratio (%) of the set
point to the detector output.
…… Detector specifications
When the detector used has the specifications that 0°C is
equivalent to 4mA and 50°C to 20mA, the set point of 25°C is
50% because 4mA is equivalent to 0% and 20mA to 100%.
…… When the set point setting input (0 to 5V) and detector output
(4 to 20mA) must be calibrated, make the following calibration*.
Calibration.
…… Set point = 50%
Set the set point.
Since the specifications of terminal 2 are such that 0% is
Enter a voltage to across
equivalent to 0V and 100% to 5V, enter 2.5V into terminal 2.
terminals 2-5 according to the set
point (%).
…… Set the room temperature to 25°C
Set "20" or "21" in Pr. 128 to enable PID control.
Determine the set point of the item
to be adjusted.
Determine the set point.
Operation
Set the proportional band and
integral time to slightly higher
values and the differential time to
9999 (No control), and switch on
the start signal.
Is the process
value steady?
…… For PU operation, set the set point (0 to 100%) in Pr. 133.
During operation, set the proportional band and integral time to
slightly higher values and set the differential time to 9999 (No
control). In accordance with the system operation, reduce the
proportional band and integral time. For slow response system
where a deadband exists, differential control shuold be turned
on and increased slowly.
Yes
No
Adjust parameters.
Set the proportional band and integral
time to slightly higher values and set
the differential time to a slightly lower
value to stabilize the process value.
Optimize parameters.
While the process value is steady, the
proportional band and integral time may
be reduced and the differential time
increased throughout the operation.
END
* When calibration is required, use Pr. 902 and Pr. 903 (terminal 2) or
Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 (terminal 4) to calibrate the detector output and
set point setting input in the PU mode during an inverter stop.
140
PARAMETERS
<Set point input calibration>
1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0V) to across terminals 2-5.
2. Make calibration using Pr. 902. At this time, enter the frequency which should be
output by the inverter at the deviation of 0% (e.g. 0Hz).
3. Apply the voltage of 100% set point setting (e.g. 5V) to across terminals 2-5.
4. Make calibration using Pr. 903. At this time, enter the frequency which should be
output by the inverter at the deviation of 100% (e.g. 50Hz).
<Detector output calibration>
1. Apply the output current of 0% detector setting (e.g. 4mA) across terminals 4-5.
2. Make calibration using Pr. 904.
3. Apply the output current of 100% detector setting (e.g. 20mA) across terminals 4-5.
4. Make calibration using Pr. 905.
Note: The frequencies set in Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 should be the same as set in
Pr. 902 and Pr. 903.
The results of the above calibration are as shown below:
[Set point setting]
[Detection value]
(%)
100
(%)
100
50
0
0
0
5
(V)
[Manipulated variable]
Manipulated
variable(Hz)
0
0 4
20 (mA)
0
100 Deviation
(%)
Note: 1. If the multi-speed (RH, RM, RL) signal or jog operation (jog) signal is
entered, PID control is stopped and multi-speed or jog operation is started.
2. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, the other
functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding
terminals before making settings.
3. When you have chosen the PID control, the minimum frequency is as set in
Pr. 902 and the maximum frequency is as set in Pr. 903.
(The settings of Pr. 1 "maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "minimum frequency"
are also valid.)
141
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.38 Output current detection function (Pr. 150, Pr. 151)
Pr. 150 "output current detection level"
Pr. 151 "output current detection period"
Related parameters
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
(output terminal function
selection)
! If the output current remains higher than the Pr. 150 setting during inverter operation
for longer than the time set in Pr. 151, the output current detection signal (Y12) is
output from the inverter's open collector output terminal.
(Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 to assign the terminal used for Y12 signal output.)
Factory
Setting
150%
0
Setting
Range
0 to 200.0%
0 to 10 s
Output current
detection signal (Y12) OFF
Output current
Parameter
Number
150
151
100ms
ON
OFF
Pr.150
Pr.151
Time
<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number
150
151
Description
Set the output current detection level.
100% is the rated inverter current.
Set the output current detection time. Set a period of time from when the
output current rises to or above the Pr. 150 setting to when the output
current detection signal (Y12) is output.
Note: 1. The output current detection signal is held on for about 100ms (at least) if it
switches on once when the output current rises to or above the preset
detection level.
2. This function is also valid during execution of offline auto tuning.
3. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, the other
functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding
terminals before making settings.
142
PARAMETERS
"" Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153)
4.2.39 Zero current detection (Pr. 152, Pr. 153)
Related parameters
Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output
terminal function selection)
Pr. 152 "zero current detection level"
Pr. 153 "zero current detection period"
When the inverter's output current falls to "0", torque will not be generated. This may
cause a gravity drop when the inverter is used in vertical lift application.
To prevent this, the output current "zero" signal can be output from the inverter to close
the mechanical brake when the output current has fallen to "zero".
! If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting during inverter operation
for longer than the time set in Pr. 153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is
output from the inverter's open collector output terminal.
(Use any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 to assign the terminal used for Y13 signal output.)
Parameter
Number
152
153
Factory
Setting
5.0%
0.5 s
Start signal
Setting
Range
0 to 200.0%
0.05 to 1 s
OFF ON
Pr. 152 "zero current
detection level"
Zero current
detection signal
output (Y13)
Pr.152
OFF
(Note)
100ms
OFF
ON
Pr. 153 "detection time"
Output current 0 [A]
ON
Pr. 153 "detection time"
<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters:
Parameter
Number
152
153
Description
Set the zero current detection level.
Set this parameter to define the percentage of the rated current at which the
zero current will be detected.
Set the zero current detection time.
Set a period of time from when the output current falls to or below the
Pr. 152 setting to when the zero current detection signal (Y13) is output.
Note: 1. If the current falls below the preset detection level but the timing condition is
not satisfied, the zero current detection signal is held on for about 100ms.
2. This function is also valid during execution of offline auto tuning.
3. When the terminal functions are changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, the other
functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding
terminals before making settings.
143
4
PARAMETERS
CAUTION
The zero current detection level setting should not be too high, and the
zero current detection time setting should not be too long. Otherwise, the
detection signal may not be output when torque is not generated at a low
output current.
To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous
conditions by use of the zero current detection signal, install a safety
backup such as an emergency brake.
"Stall prevention operation selection (Pr. 156)
4.2.40 Stall prevention function and current limit function (Pr. 156)
Pr. 156 " stall prevention operation
selection"
Related parameters
Pr. 22 "stall prevention operation level"
Pr. 23 "stall prevention operation level
compensation factor at double
speed"
You can make settings to disable stall prevention caused by overcurrent and to disable
the inverter from an overcurrent trip if an excessive current occurs due to sudden load
variation or turning the inverter's output side ON-OFF (to disable the fast-response
current limit which limits the current).
• Stall prevention
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output frequency of the inverter is
automatically varied to reduce the current.
• Fast-response Current limit
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is shut off to prevent
an overcurrent.
Parameter
Number
156
Factory
Setting
0
Setting
Range
0 to 31, 100
144
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Refer to the following tables and set the parameter as required.
"
'
"
'
"
'
"
'
"
"
"
'
'
"
"
'
'
"
"
'
'
"
"
"
"
"
"
'
'
'
'
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
100
"
'
"
'
"
'
"
'
"
'
"
Decelerati
on
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
Constant
speed
'
"
'
'
'
'
Accelerati
on
"
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
"
"
'
'
"
"
'
'
"
"
"
"
"
"
'
'
'
'
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
'
'
'
'
'
"
"
"
"
'
'
"
'
Regenerative Driving
'
Decelerati
on
'
"
Constant
speed
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accelerati
on
FastResponse
Current
Pr. 156
Limit
Setting
': Activated
": Not
activated
Stall Prevention
OL Signal
Operation
Selection
Output
Fast':
': Activated
Response
Operation
:
Not
activated
"
Current
Pr. 156
continued
Limit
":
Setting
': Activated
Operation
": Not
not
activated
continued
(Note 1)
Stall Prevention
OL Signal
Operation Selection Output
': Activated
':
": Not activated Operation
continued
":
Operation
not
continued
(Note 1)
'
'
Note 1: When "Operation not continued for OL signal output" is selected, the "E.OLT"
alarm code (stopped by stall prevention) is displayed and operation stopped.
(Alarm stop display "E.OLT")
2: If the load is heavy, the lift is predetermined, or the acceleration/deceleration
time is short, the stall prevention may be activated and the motor not
stopped in the preset acceleration/deceleration time. Therefore, set optimum
values to the Pr. 156 and stall prevention operation level.
3: In vertical lift applications, make setting so that the fast-response current
limit is not activated. Torque may not be produced, causing a gravity drop.
CAUTION
Always perform test operation.
Stall prevention operation performed during acceleration may increase
the acceleration time.
Stall prevention operation performed during constant speed may cause
sudden speed changes.
Stall prevention operation performed during deceleration may increase
the deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance.
Pr. 158 & Refer to Pr. 52.
145
4
PARAMETERS
4.2.41 User group selection (Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 176)
Pr. 160 "user group read selection"
Pr. 173 "user group 1 registration"
Pr. 174 "user group 1 deletion"
Pr. 175 "user group 2 registration"
Pr. 176 "user group 2 deletion"
Among all parameters, a total of 32 parameters can be registered to two different user
groups. The registered parameters may only be accessed.
The other parameters cannot be read.
Parameter
Number
160
173
174
175
176
Factory
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
Setting Range
0, 1, 10, 11
0 to 999
0 to 999, 9999
0 to 999
0 to 999, 9999
Remarks
9999: Batch deletion
9999: Batch deletion
<Setting examples show the use of the control panel (FR-PA02- 02)>
(1) Registration of parameter to user group (when registering Pr. 3 to
user group 1)
Flickering
Pr. 173 reading
The number of
parameters set and
registered by the
user appears.
+++
+++
1.5 s
+++
SET
+++
SET
Pr. 3 is registered Press the
/
to user group 1. key to shift to the next
parameter to be
registered.
Press the SET key to
register the parameter.
Press the
/
key to select the
parameter number to
be registered.
(2) Deletion of parameter from the user group (when Pr. 5 is deleted
from user group 1)
Flickering
Pr. 174 reading
The number of
parameters set and
registered by the
user appears.
Press the
/
key to select the
parameter number to
be deleted.
146
+++
1.5 s
+++
+++
SET
+++
SET
Pr. 5 is deleted
Press the
/
from user group 1. key to shift to the next
parameter to be
deleted.
Press the SET key to
delete the parameter.
PARAMETERS
(3) Set the required value in Pr. 160 to make the user group or groups
valid or invalid.
Pr. 160 Setting
0
1
10
11
Description
Previous parameters read
User group 1's parameters read
User group 2's parameters read
User group 1 and 2 parameters read
Note: 1. The Pr. 77, Pr. 160 and Pr. 991 values may always be read independently of
the user group setting.
2. The Pr. 173 or Pr. 174 value read indicates the number of parameters
registered to group 1, and the Pr. 175 or Pr. 176 value read indicates the
number of parameters registered to group 2.
3. If "0" is set in the second digit of two-digit Pr. 160, it is not displayed.
However, "0" is displayed when it is set in the first digit only.
4. When "9999" is set in Pr. 174 or Pr. 176, the parameters registered to the
corresponding user group are batch-deleted.
4
147
PARAMETERS
" " Actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 171)
4.2.42 Actual operation hour meter clear (Pr. 171)
Related parameter
Pr. 52 "control panel/PU main
display data selection"
Pr. 171 "actual operation hour meter
clear"
You can clear the monitor (actual operation hour) value which is selected when Pr. 52
is "23".
Parameter
Number
171
Factory
Setting
0
Setting
Range
0
<Setting>
Write "0" in the parameter to clear the actual operation hour.
Pr. 173 to Pr. 176 & Refer to Pr. 160.
4.2.43 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183)
"Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183)
Pr. 180 "RL terminal function selection"
Pr. 181 "RM terminal function selection"
Pr. 182 "RH terminal function selection"
Pr. 183 "MRS terminal function selection"
Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.
Parameter
Number
Terminal
Symbol
Factory
Setting
180
RL
0
181
RM
1
182
RH
2
183
MRS
6
148
Factory-Set Terminal
Function
Low-speed operation
command (RL)
Middle-speed operation
command (RM)
High-speed operation
command (RH)
Output shut-off (MRS)
Setting
Range
0 to 8, 16, 18
0 to 8, 16, 18
0 to 8, 16, 18
0 to 8, 16, 18
PARAMETERS
<Setting>
Refer to the following list and set the parameters.
Setting
Signal
Name
0
RL
Function
Pr. 59 = 0
Low-speed operation command
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remote setting (setting clear)
1
RM
Pr. 59 = 0
Middle-speed operation
command
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remote setting (deceleration)
2
RH
3
4
5
6
RT
AU
STOP
MRS
7
OH
8
REX
16
X16
18
X18
Pr. 59 = 0
High-speed operation command
Related
Parameters
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6,
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6,
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59
Pr. 44 to Pr. 48
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 * Remote setting (acceleration)
Second function selection
Current input selection
Start self-holding terminal
Output shut-off terminal
External thermal relay input **
The external thermal relay provided for overheat
Refer to page 163.
protection or the embedded temperature relay
within the motor is activated to stop the inverter.
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6,
15-speed selection (combination with three
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
speeds of RL, RM, RH)
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
PU operation-external operation switch-over
Pr. 79
General-purpose magnetic flux vector-V/F switchover (OFF: general-purpose magnetic flux vector Pr. 80
control, ON: V/F control) (Note 3)
**: When Pr. 59 = "1" or "2", the functions of the RL, RM and RH signals change as
listed above.
**: Activated when the relay contact "opens".
Note: 1. One function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the
terminal inputs are OR’ ed.
2. The speed command priorities are higher in order of multi-speed setting
(RH, RM, RL, REX) and AU.
3. When V/F control is selected using the V/F-general-purpose magnetic flux
switch-over function, the secondry functions are also selected.
During operation, you cannot switch between V/F and general-purpose
magnetic flux. Should you switch between V/F and general-purpose
magnetic flux, only the second functions are selected.
4. Use common terminals to assign multi-speeds (7 speeds) and remote
setting. They cannot be set individually.
(Common terminals are used since these functions are designed for multiple
speed setting and need not be set at the same time.)
5. Functions are invalid if values other than the above are set to Pr. 180 to
Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection).
149
4
PARAMETERS
"Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192)
4.2.44 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192)
Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection"
Pr. 191 "FU terminal function selection"
Pr. 192 "A, B, C terminal function selection"
You can change the functions of the open collector and contact output terminals.
Parameter
Number
190
191
192
Terminal
Symbol
RUN
FU
ABC
Factory
Setting
0
4
99
Factory-Set Terminal
Function
Inverter running
Output frequency detection
Alarm output
Setting
Range
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
<Setting>
Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Setting
Signal
Name
Function
0
RUN
Inverter running
1
SU
Up to frequency
3
OL
Overload alarm
4
FU
Output frequency
detection
11
RY
Inverter operation
ready
12
Y12
13
Y13
14
15
FDN
FUP
16
RL
98
LF
99
ABC
Output current
detection
Zero current
detection
PID lower limit
PID upper limit
PID forwardreverse rotation
output
Minor fault output
Alarm output
Operation
Output during operation when
the inverter output frequency
rises to or above the starting
frequency.
Refer to Pr. 41 "up-to-frequency
sensitivity". (Note 1)
Output while stall prevention
function is activated.
Refer to Pr. 42, Pr. 43 (output
frequency detection).
Output when the inverter is
ready to be started by switching
the start signal on.
Refer to Pr. 150 and Pr. 151
(output current detection).
Refer to Pr. 152 and Pr. 153
(zero current detection).
Refer to Pr. 128 to Pr. 134 (PID
control).
Related
Parameters

Pr. 41
Pr. 22, Pr. 23,
Pr. 66
Pr. 42, Pr. 43

Pr. 150,
Pr. 151
Pr. 152,
Pr. 153
Pr. 128 to
Pr. 134
Output when a minor fault (fan
Pr. 121,
failure or communication error
Pr. 244
warning) occurs.
Output when the inverter's
protective function is activated to

stop the output (major fault).
Note: 1. The same function may be set to more than one terminal.
2. Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 do not function if the values set are other than the above.
150
PARAMETERS
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239& Refer to Pr. 4.
Pr. 240& Refer to Pr. 72.
"Cooling
fan operation selection (
Pr. 244)
4.2.45 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244)
Pr. 244 "cooling fan operation selection"
You can control the operation of the cooling fan built in the inverter 0.75K or more.
(whether there is a cooling fan or not depends on the models. Refer to the outline
dimensional drawings (Refer to page 190).
Parameter
Number
244
Factory
Setting
0
Setting
Range
0, 1
<Setting>
Setting
0
1
Description
Operated at power on (independent of whether the inverter is running or at
a stop).
Cooling fan on-off control valid
(The cooling fan is always on while the inverter is running. During a stop,
the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches on-off according to
temperature.)
<Reference>
In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty, [FN] is shown on
the control panel, and the minor fault (LF) signal is output. Use any of Pr. 190 to
Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) to allocate the terminal used to output the
LF signal.
1) Pr. 244 = "0"
When the fan comes to a stop with power on.
2) Pr. 244 = "1"
When the inverter is running and the fan stops during fan ON command or the fan
starts during fan OFF command.
Note:
When the terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, the other
functions may be affected. Confirm the functions of the corresponding
terminals before making settings.
151
4
PARAMETERS
"" Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)
4.2.46 Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)
Pr. 245 "rated motor slip"
Pr. 246 "slip compensation response time"
Pr. 247 "constant-output region slip compensation selection"
The inverter output current may be used to assume motor slip to keep the motor speed
constant.
Parameter
Number
245
246
247
Factory
Setting
9999
0.5
9999
Setting Range
0 to 50%, 9999
0.01 to 10 s
0, 9999
Remarks
9999: No slip compensation
9999: Slip compensation made
<Setting>
Rated slip =
Parameter
Number
245
246
247
Synchronous speed at base frequency - rated speed
×100[%]
Synchronous speed at base frequency
Setting
Function
0 to 50%
9999
0.01 to 10 s
Used to set the rated motor slip.
Slip compensation is not made.
Used to set the slip compensation response time. (Note)
Slip compensation is not made in the constant output
range (frequency range above the frequency set in Pr. 3).
Slip compensation is made in the constant output range.
0
9999
Note:
When this value is made smaller, response will be faster.
However, as load inertia is greater, a regenerative overvoltage (OVT) error is
more liable to occur.
152
PARAMETERS
""
Ground
fault (Pr.
detection
Stop
selection
250) at start (Pr. 249)
4.2.47 Stop selection (Pr. 250)
Related parameters
Pr. 7 "acceleration time"
Pr. 8 "deceleration time"
Pr. 44 "second acceleration/
deceleration time"
Pr. 45 "second deceleration
time"
Pr. 250 "stop selection"
Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start
signal (STF/STR) switches off.
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
Setting Range
250
9999
0 to 100 s, 1000 to
1100 s, 8888, 9999
(1)Pr. 250 = "9999"
When the start signal switches off, the motor is decelerated to a stop.
Start signal
Output
frequency
(Hz)
OFF
ON
Decelerated when start signal switches off.
Deceleration time (time set in Pr. 8, etc.)
DC brake
Time
(2)Pr. 250 = 0 to 100 seconds (output is shut off after preset time)
The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 250 has elapsed after the start signal
was switched off. The motor coasts to a stop.
4
Start signal
Output
frequency
(Hz)
OFF
Output is shut off when time set in Pr. 250
has elapsed after start signal was switched
off.
Motor coasts to a stop.
Time
RUN signal
OFF
153
PARAMETERS
When the Pr. 250 value is 8888, the functions of terminals STF and STR change as
shown below:
STF = start signal, STR = rotation direction signal
STF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
STR
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Inverter Operating Status
Stop
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
When the Pr. 250 value is any of 1000 to 1100s, the functions of terminals STF and
STR are the same as when the Pr. 250 value is 8888.
Also, for the stopping method used when the start signal switches off, the output is shut
off (the motor coasts to a stop) after the period set in Pr. 250 (i.e. 1000s) have elapsed.
Note: 1. The RUN signal switches off when the output stops.
2. When the start signal is switched on again during motor coasting, the motor
starts at 0Hz.
3. When the Pr. 250 value is 0, the output is shut off within the shortest time.
4.2.48 Output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251)
Pr. 251 "Output phase failure protection selection"
You can make invalid the output phase failure protection (E.LF) function which stops
the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side
(load side) becomes open.
Choose "without output phase failure protection" when the motor capacity is smaller
than the inverter capacity (when the output current is less than approximately 25% of
the rated inverter current value as a guideline), since performing operation in such a
case may activate output phase failure protection.
Parameter
Number
Setting
Range
Minimum
Setting
Increments
Factory
Setting
251
0, 1
1
1
Description
0: Without output phase failure protection
1: With output phase failure protection
Pr. 254& Refer to Pr. 73
Pr. 338 to Pr. 340& Refer to Pr. 117
Pr. 342& Refer to Pr. 117
154
PARAMETERS
"" Display meter (frequency meter) calibration (Pr. 900)
4.2.49 Meter (frequency meter) calibration (Pr. 901)
Related parameters
Pr. 55 "frequency monitoring
reference"
Pr. 56 "current monitoring
reference"
Pr. 158 "AM terminal function
selection"
Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration"
" By using the control panel or parameter unit, you can calibrate a meter connected to
terminal AM to full scale deflection.
" Terminal AM is factory-set to provide a 10VDC output in the full-scale state of each
monitored data. Pr. 901 allows the output voltage ratio (gain) to be adjusted
according to the meter reading. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10VDC.
Meter
10V full scale
Analog meter
AM
+
-
5
(1)Calibration of terminal AM
1) Connect a 0-10VDC meter (frequency meter) across inverter terminals AM-5.
(Note the polarity. AM is the positive terminal.)
2) Set any of "0, 1, 2" in Pr. 158.
When the running frequency or inverter output current has been selected as the
output signal, preset in Pr. 55 or Pr. 56 the running frequency or current at which
the output signal is 10V.
4
155
PARAMETERS
<Operation procedure>
! When using the control panel (FR-PA02-02)
1) Select the PU operation mode.
2) Set the running frequency.
3) Press the
SET
key.
4) Read Pr. 901 "AM terminal calibration".
5) Press the
key to run the inverter. (Motor need not be connected.)
FWD
6) Hold down the
/
key to adjust the meter pointer to a required position.
(Depending on the setting, it may take some time until the pointer moves.)
7) Press the
SET
key for about 1.5 s.
8) Press the
STOP
RESET
key to stop the inverter.
REMARKS
Calibration can also be made for external operation. Set the frequency in the external
operation mode and make calibration in the steps 4) to 8).
Note:
It is possible to calibrate even during operation.
156
PARAMETERS
"" Bias potentiometer
and gain of frequency
setting
voltage
(current)
and built-in frequency
setting
(Pr. 902 to
Pr. 905,
Pr. 922,
Pr. 923)
4.2.50 Biases and gains of the frequency setting voltage (current)
(Pr. 902 to Pr. 905)
Pr. 902 "frequency setting voltage bias"
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain"
Pr. 904 "frequency setting current bias"
Related parameters
Pr. 38 "frequency at 5V (10V) input"
Pr. 39 "frequency at 20mA input"
Pr. 73 "0-5/0-10V selection"
Pr. 79 "operation mode selection"
Pr. 905 "frequency setting current gain"
The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the relationship between the input
signal entered from outside the inverter (to set the output frequency), i.e. 0 to 5VDC,
0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mADC, and the output frequency.
902
Factory
Setting
0V
0Hz
0 to 10V
0 to 60Hz
903
5V
50Hz
0 to 10V
1 to 400Hz
904
4mA
0Hz
0 to 20mA
0 to 60Hz
905
20mA 50Hz 0 to 20mA 1 to 400Hz
Parameter
Number
Setting Range
Output frequency (Hz)
" Use Pr. 902 to set the bias of the voltage signal and use Pr. 903 to set its gain.
" Use Pr. 904 to set the bias of the current signal and use Pr. 905 to set its gain.
Factory setting
(60Hz)
Gain Pr.903
Bias
Pr.905
Pr.902
Pr.904
0
5V Pr.73
10V
0
20mA
4
Frequency setting signal
<Setting>
(1)The frequency setting voltage (current) biases and gains may be adjusted by any of
the three following ways:
1) Any point can be adjusted with a voltage applied across terminals 2-5 (with a
current flowing across terminals 4-5).
2) Any point can be adjusted with no voltage applied across terminals 2-5 (with no
current flowing across terminals 4-5).
3) Only the bias and gain frequencies are adjusted and the voltage (current) is not
adjusted.
157
4
PARAMETERS
Pr. 903 "frequency setting voltage gain"
(Pr. 902, Pr. 904, Pr. 905 can also be adjusted similarly.)
<Adjustment procedure> When using an external frequency setting signal to set the frequency.
(1) Power-on (monitoring mode)
Hz
MON
PU
MODE
FWD
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
(2) Choose the PU operation mode.
1) Using the
MODE
"Monitoring mode
Hz
key, make sure that the PU operation mode has been selected.
MODE
"Frequency setting
mode
Hz
MODE
"Parameter setting
mode
MODE
MON
PU
PU
PU
"Operation mode
(PU operation mode)
"Help mode
MODE
MODE
PU
PU
MODE
FWD
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
Confirm that the PU operation mode
(
) has been chosen.
In the JOG operation mode (
)
or external operation mode (
),
press the
/
key to display
.
If
cannot be displayed by
pressing the
/
key in the external
operation mode (
).
(if Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" ≠ "0"),
refer to 2) and set "1" (PU operation mode)
in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection".
158
PARAMETERS
2) Set "1" (PU operation mode) in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection".
Example: To change the external operation mode (Pr. 79=2) to the PU
operation mode (Pr. 79=1)
Using the
MODE
key,
choose the "parameter
setting mode" as in 1).
"Parameter setting mode
Most significant
digit flickers
EXT
MODE
SET
FWD
SET
REV
Least significant
Middle digit flickers digit flickers
SET
STOP
RESET
×7 times
0 to 9
"Current setting
SET
×9 times
0 to 9
"Setting change
SET
Press for
1.5 s
SET
"Setting write
Flicker
If
appears, make sure that the forward
rotation (STF) or reverse rotation (STR) signal
connected to the control terminal is not on.
If it is on, turn it off.
"1" (PU operation mode) has been set in Pr. 79.
If
appears, you did not press the SET
key for 1.5 seconds when writing the setting.
Press the
key once, press the SET key, and
restart the setting from the beginning.
159
4
PARAMETERS
(3) Read Pr. 903 and show the current setting of the gain frequency.
(Pr. 902, Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 can also be adjusted similarly.)
"Parameter setting mode
Using the MODE key, choose the
"parameter setting mode" as in (2)-1).
PU
MODE
FWD
SET
REV
STOP
RESET
SET
Most significant Middle digit
digit flickers.
flickers.
Least significant
digit flickers.
SET
×9
times
×3
times
SET
SET
0 to 9
0 to 9
Current setting of gain frequency
Hz RUN
A
PU EXT
(4) Set a gain frequency in Pr. 903 and show the analog voltage value across
terminals 2-5 in %.
(when the frequency is set to 80Hz)
Current setting of
gain frequency
"Changing the gain
frequency
Hz RUN
A
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
PU EXT
Press
to
change the set frequency.
Press for 1.5 s
SET
"Analog voltage value (%)
across terminals 2-5
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
In any of the methods in (5)-1) to (5)-3) on the following
page, continue the setting until the analog voltage value
flickers. If you end the setting here, the gain frequency
change will not be reflected.
160
PARAMETERS
" When not adjusting the gain voltage & To (5)-1)
" When adjusting any point by applying a voltage & To (5)-2)
" When adjusting any point without applying a voltage & To (5)-3)
(5)-1) How to adjust the gain frequency only without the voltage being adjusted
"Analog voltage
value (%) across
terminals 2-5
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
or
key once to display
"Press the
the current analog voltage adjustment.
Example: When analog voltage
adjustment value is 100% (5V)
Press for 1.5 s
SET
go to (6)
Flicker
(5)-2) How to adjust any point by applying a voltage across terminals 2-5
(e.g. from the external potentiometer) (current: across terminals 4-5)
(when applying 5V)
"Analog voltage
value (%) across
terminals 2-5
Hz RUN
"Apply a 5V voltage.
(Turn the external potentiometer
connected across terminals 2-5 to maximum.)
A MON
PU EXT
Press for 1.5 s
SET
When the potentiometer is
at the maximum position,
the value is nearly 100 (%).
Flicker
go to (6)
4
161
PARAMETERS
(5)-3) How to adjust any point without applying a voltage across terminals 2-5
(without a current flowing across terminals 4-5)
(when changing from 4V (80%) to 5V (100%))
"Analog voltage
value (%) across
terminals 2-5
"Set the gain voltage (%) with
the
key.
/
"Press the
or
key
[0(%) for 0V (0mA), 100(%) for
once to display the current
analog voltage calibration value. 5V (10V, 20mA)]
Hz RUN
A MON
PU EXT
/
Press for 1.5 s
SET
Flicker
(6) Press the
SET
go to (6)
key to shift to the next parameter.
(7) Re-set Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" according to the operation mode to be
used.
Note: 1. If the Pr. 903 or Pr. 905 (gain adjustment) value is changed, the Pr. 20 value
does not change.
2. When the Pr. 903 or Pr. 905 value is set, the value of Pr. 38 "frequency at
5V (10V) input" or Pr. 39 "frequency at 20mA input" changes automatically.
CAUTION
Be careful when setting the bias frequency at 0V to any value other than
"0". Even without the speed command, the motor will start running at the
set frequency by merely switching on the start signal.
162
C CHAPTER
H A P T E R 55
PROTECTIVE
PROTECTIVE
FUNCTIONS
FUNCTIONS
This chapter explains the "protective functions" of this
product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
5.1 Errors (Alarms) ....................................................... 163
5.2 Troubleshooting ...................................................... 172
5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection .......... 175
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
5.1 Errors (Alarms)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.1 Errors (Alarms)
If any fault has occurred in the inverter, the corresponding protective function is activated
to bring the inverter to an alarm stop and automatically give the corresponding error
(alarm) indication on the optional control panel or the parameter unit display.
If your fault does not correspond to any of the following errors or if you have any other
problem, please contact your sales representative.
• Retention of alarm output signal .... When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on
the power supply side of the inverter is opened at
the activation of the protective function, the
inverter's control power will be lost and the alarm
output will not be held.
• Alarm indication ............................. When the protective function is activated, the
operation panel display automatically switches to
the above indication.
• Resetting method .......................... When the protective function is activated, the
inverter output is kept stopped. Unless reset,
therefore, the inverter cannot restart. Switch
power off once, then on again; or apply RES
signal for more than 0.1 seconds. Kept on, "Err."
appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is
being reset.
• When the protective function is activated, take the corresponding corrective action,
then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
5.1.1 Error (alarm) definitions
(1) Major faults
When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and the alarm is
output.
Operation Panel Indication
E. OC1
Name
Corrective action
Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds
approximately 200% of the rated current during acceleration,
the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check for sudden acceleration.
Check for output short-circuit/ground fault.
Increase the acceleration time.
Operation Panel Indication
E. OC2
Name
Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds
approximately 200% of the rated current during constant
speed, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter
output.
Check for sudden load change.
Check for output short-circuit/ground fault.
Keep load stable.
Description
Check point
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
FR-PU04
163
OC During Acc
Stedy Spd OC
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
E. OC3
Name
Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds
approximately 200% of the rated current during deceleration
(other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective
circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check for sudden speed reduction.
Check for output short-circuit/ground fault.
Check for too fast operation of motor's mechanical brake.
Increase the deceleration time.
Adjust brake operation.
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
Operation Panel Indication
E. OV1
Name
Check point
Corrective action
Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during acceleration
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main
circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the
protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. It
may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the
power supply system.
Check for too slow acceleration.
Decrease the acceleration time.
Operation Panel Indication
E. OV2
Name
Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during constant speed
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main
circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the
protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the
power supply system.
Check for sudden load change.
• Keep load stable.
• Use the brake unit or high power factor converter (FR-HC)
as required.
Description
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
OC During Dec
FR-PU04
Stedy Spd OV
Operation Panel Indication
E. OV3
Name
Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during deceleration or stop
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main
circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the
protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
It may also be activated by a surge voltage generated in the
power supply system.
Check for sudden speed reduction.
• Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time
which matches the inertia moment of the load.)
• Decrease the braking duty.
• Use the brake unit or high power factor converter (FR-HC)
as required.
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
OV During Acc
164
OV During Dec
5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
E. THM
Motor Overload
Motor overload shut-off (electronic overcurrent protection)
(Note 1)
The electronic overcurrent protection in the inverter detects
motor overheat due to overload or reduced cooling capability
during constant-speed operation to stop the inverter output.
When a multi-pole motor or two or more motors are run,
provide a thermal relay in the output side of the inverter.
Check the motor for use under overload.
• Reduce the load weight.
• For the constant-torque motor, change the Pr. 71 setting to
the constant-torque motor setting.
FR-PU04
E. THT
Inv. Overload
Inverter overload shut-off (electronic overcurrent protection)
(Note 1)
If a current of more than 150% of the rated output current
flows and overcurrent shut-off does not occur (200% or less),
inverse-time characteristics cause the electronic overcurrent
protection to be activated to stop the inverter output in order
to protect the output transistors.
Check the motor for use under overload.
Reduce the load weight.
Note:1 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal heat integrating data of the
electronic overcurrent protection.
Operation Panel Indication
E. FIN
Name
Fin overheat
If the cooling fin overheats, the overheat sensor is actuated
to stop the inverter output.
• Check for too high ambient temperature.
• Check for cooling fin clogging.
Set the ambient temperature to within the specifications.
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
165
H/Sink O/Temp
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
E. BE
Name
Brake transistor alarm detection (Note 2)
If a brake transistor fault occurs due to excessively large
regenerative energy from the motor, for example, that fault is
detected to stop the inverter output. In this case, the inverter
power must be switched off immediately.
Check for improper braking duty.
Change the inverter.
Please contact your sales representative.
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
Br. Cct. Fault (Note)
Note: 2 This function is activated only when the optional brake resistor is connected.
Operation Panel Indication
E. GF
Name
Check point
Corrective action
Output side ground fault overcurrent protection
This function stops the inverter output if a ground fault
overcurrent flows due to a ground fault which occurred in the
inverter's output (load) side.
Check for a ground fault in the motor and connection cable.
Remedy the ground fault portion.
Operation Panel Indication
E. OHT
Name
External thermal relay operation (Note 3)
If the external thermal relay designed for motor overheat
protection or the internally mounted temperature relay in the
motor switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is
stopped. If the relay contacts are reset automatically, the
inverter will not restart unless it is reset.
• Check for motor overheating.
• Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any
of Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection).
Reduce the load and operating duty.
Description
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
FR-PU04
Ground Fault
OH Fault
Note:3 This function is activated only when OH has been set to any of Pr. 180 to
Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection).
Operation Panel Indication
E. OLT
Name
Stall prevention
The running frequency has fallen to 0 by stall prevention
activated. (OL while stall prevention is being activated.)
Check the motor for use under overload.
Reduce the load weight.
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
166
Stll Prev STP
5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
E.OPT
Name
Option alarm (Note 4)
Stops the inverter output if a functional fault (e.g.
communication error of the communication option) occurs in
the communication option.
Stops the inverter output if the inverter station is
disconnected from the system in the NET mode.
• Check that the communication cable is not open.
• Check that the PU connector is plugged securely.
• Please contact your sales representative.
• Securely plug the PU connector.
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
Option Fault
Note 4: During NET mode communication, alarm "E. OPT" indicates the "E. PUE"
error. Refer to "E. PUE".
Operation Panel Indication
E. PE
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Parameter storage device alarm
Operation Panel Indication
E. PUE
Name
Corrective action
Parameter unit disconnection
This function stops the inverter output if communication
between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the PU is
disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75.
This function stops the inverter output if the number of
successive communication errors is greater than the number
of permissible retries when the Pr. 121 value is other than
"9999" for RS-485 communication from the PU connector.
• Check for loose fitting of the control panel (FR-PA02-02) or
FR-PU04.
• Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Fit the control panel (FR-PA02-02) and FR-PU04 securely.
Operation Panel Indication
E. RET
Name
Check point
Corrective action
Retry count exceeded
If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of
retries set, this function stops the inverter output.
Find the cause of alarm occurrence.
Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.
Operation Panel Indication
E. CPU
Name
CPU error
If the arithmetic operation of the built-in CPU does not end
within a predetermined period, the inverter self-determines it
as an alarm and stops the output.

Please contact your sales representative.
Description
Check point
Description
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
Corrupt Memry
A fault occurred in parameters stored (example: E2PROM fault).
Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Please contact your sales representative.
FR-PU04
FR-PU04
FR-PU04
167
PU Leave Out
Retry No Over
CPU Fault
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
E. 3
Name
Option fault
Also stops the inverter output if the dedicated option used in
the inverter results in setting error or connection (connector)
fault.
• Check that the function setting and operation of the option
are correct.
• Check that the communication option is plugged in the
connector securely.
• Connect the communication option securely.
• Contact your sales representative.
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
E. 6
Fault 3
Fault 6
Operation Panel Indication
FR-PU04
E. 7
Fault 7
Check point
Corrective action
CPU error
This function stops the inverter output if a communication
error occurs in the built-in CPU.

Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication
E. LF
Name
Output phase failure protection
This function stops the inverter output if one of the three
phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side)
results in open phase.
• Check the wiring (Check the motor for a fault.)
• Check that the capacity of the used motor is not smaller
than the inverter capacity.
• Wire the cables properly.
• Check the setting of Pr. 251 "output phase failure protection
selection".
Name
Description
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
E. LF
(2) Minor fault
The output is not shut off when the protective function is activated. You can make
parameter setting to output the minor fault signal. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192
(output terminal function selection). Refer to page 150.)
Operation Panel Indication
FN
Name
Fan fault
For the inverter which contains a cooling fan, FN appears on
the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault
or operates differently from the setting of Pr. 244 "cooling fan
operation selection".
Check the cooling fan for a fault.
Change the fan.
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
168
Fan Failure
5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
(3) Warnings
Operation Panel Indication
OL
Name
Stall prevention (over current)
During
If a current of more than 150% (Note 5) of
acceleration
the rated inverter current flows in the
motor, this function stops the increase in
frequency until the overload current
reduces to prevent the inverter from
resulting in over current shut-off. When the
overload current has reduced below 150%,
this function increases the frequency
again.
During
If a current of more than 150% (Note 5) of
constant-speed the rated inverter current flows in the
operation
motor, this function lowers the frequency
until the overload current reduces to
prevent overcurrent shut-off. When the
overload current has reduced below 150%,
this function increases the frequency up to
the set value.
During
If a current of more than 150% (Note 5) of
deceleration
the rated inverter current flows in the
motor, this function stops the decrease in
frequency until the overload current
reduces to prevent the inverter from
resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When the
overload current has reduced below 150%,
this function decreases the frequency
again.
Check the motor for use under overload.
The acceleration/deceleration time may change.
Increase the stall prevention operation level with Pr. 22 "stall
prevention operation level", or disable stall prevention with
Pr. 156 "stall prevention operation selection".
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
OL
Note:5 The stall prevention operation current can be set as desired. It is factory-set to
150%.
169
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Operation Panel Indication
oL
Name
Stall prevention (overvoltage)
During
If the regenerative energy of the motor
deceleration
increases too much to exceed the brake
capability, this function stops the decrease
in frequency to prevent overvoltage shutoff. As soon as the regenerative energy
has reduced, deceleration resumes.
Check for sudden speed reduction.
The deceleration time may change.
Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 "deceleration
time".
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel Indication
PS
Name
PU stop
FR-PU04
FR-PU04
oL
PS
Corrective action
STOP
A stop made by pressing the RESET
key of the PU has been
set in Pr. 75 "PU stop selection".
STOP
Check for a stop made by pressing the RESET
key of the
operation panel during external operation.
Refer to page 102.
Operation Panel Indication
Err.
Description
Check point
Description
Corrective action
This alarm appears if:
• The RES signal is on;
• You attempted to set any parameter value in the external
operation mode;
• You attempted to change the operation mode during
operation;
• You attempted to set any parameter value outside its
setting range.
• You attempted to set any parameter value during operation
(while signal STF or STR is ON).
• You attempted to set any parameter value while parameter
write is being inhibited in Pr. 77 "parameter write inhibit
selection".
Perform operation correctly.
5
170
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.1.2 To know the operating status at the occurrence of alarm
When any alarm has occurred, the display automatically switches to the indication of
the corresponding protective function (error). By pressing the MODE key at this point
without resetting the inverter, the display shows the output frequency. In this way, it is
possible to know the running frequency at the occurrence of the alarm. This also
applies to the current. After resetting, you can confirm the data in the alarm history
(refer to page 54).
5.1.3 Correspondence between digital and actual characters
There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters
and the digital characters displayed on the control panel (FR-PA02-02):
Actual
Display
Actual
Display
Actual
0
A
M
1
B
N
2
C
O
3
D
o
4
E
P
5
F
S
6
G
T
7
H
U
8
I
V
9
J
r
L
-
Display
5.1.4 Resetting the inverter
The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the
electronic overcurrent protection's internal heat calculation value and the number of
retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.
STOP
key to reset
Operation 1: ...... Using the control panel (FR-PA02-02), press the RESET
the inverter.
(This may only be performed when the inverter protective function
(major fault) is activated.)
Operation 2: ...... Switch power off once, then switch it on again.
Operation 3: ...... Switch on the reset signal (RES).
171
5.2 Troubleshooting
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.2 Troubleshooting
POINT:Check the corresponding areas. If the cause is still unknown, it is
recommended to initialize the parameters (return to factory settings), re-set
the required parameter values, and check again.
5.2.1 Motor remains stopped
(1) Check the main circuit
Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied (control panel display
is provided).
Check that the motor is connected properly.
Check that the conductor across P1-+ is connected.
(2) Check the input signals
Check that the start signal is input.
Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not
input.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not zero.
Check that the AU signal is on when the frequency setting signal is 4 to
20mA.
Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on.
Check that the sink/source connector is fitted securely.
(3) Check the parameter settings
Check that the reverse rotation prevention (Pr. 78) is not selected.
Check that the operation mode (Pr. 79) setting is correct.
Check that the bias and gain (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905) settings are correct.
Check that the starting frequency (Pr. 13) setting is not greater than the
running frequency.
Check that various operational functions (such as three-speed operation),
especially the maximum frequency (Pr. 1), are not zero.
Check that the manufacturer setting parameter Pr. 146 = 1.
(4) Check the load
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the shaft is not locked.
(5) Others
Check that the ALARM lamp is off.
Check that the control panel display does not show an error (e.g. E.OC1).
Check that the Pr. 15 "jog frequency" setting is not lower than the Pr. 13
"starting frequency" value.
5.2.2 Motor rotates in opposite direction
Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is correct.
Check that the start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are connected
properly.
172
5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
"
5.2.3 Speed greatly differs from the setting
Check that the frequency setting signal is correct. (Measure the input signal
level.)
Check that the following parameter settings are correct (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 19,
Pr. 38, Pr. 39, Pr. 245, Pr. 902 to Pr. 905).
Check that the input signal lines are not affected by external noise. (Use shielded
cables)
Check that the load is not too heavy.
5.2.4 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth
Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short.
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the torque boost setting is not too large to activate the stall prevention
function.
5.2.5 Motor current is large
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the torque boost setting is not too large.
5.2.6 Speed does not increase
Check that the maximum frequency setting is correct.
Check that the load is not too heavy. (In agitators, etc., load may become heavier
in winter.)
Check that the torque boost setting is not too large to activate the stall prevention
function.
Check that the brake resistor is not connected to terminals + - P1 accidentally.
5.2.7 Speed varies during operation
When slip compensation is selected, the output frequency varies with load
fluctuation between 0 and 2Hz. This is a normal operation and is not a fault.
(1) Inspection of load
Check that the load is not varying.
(2) Inspection of input signal
Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by noise.
Check that a malfunction does not occur due to an undesirable current when
the transistor output unit is connected, for example. (Refer to page 23.)
3) Others
Check that the setting of the applied motor capacity (Pr. 80) is correct for
the inverter capacities in general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
Check that the wiring length is within 30m in general-purpose magnetic
flux vector control.
Check that the wiring length is correct in V/F control.
173
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.2.8 Operation mode is not changed properly
If the operation mode does not change correctly, check the following:
1. External input signal .............. Check that the STF or STR signal is off.
When it is on, the operation mode cannot be
changed.
2. Parameter setting .................. Check the Pr. 79 setting.
When the setting of Pr. 79 "operation mode
selection" is "0", switching input power on
places the inverter in the external operation
mode. By pressing the MODE key twice and
pressing the
key, the external operation
mode changes to the PU operation mode.
For any other setting (1 to 8), the operation
mode is limited according to the setting.
(For details of Pr. 79, refer to page 106.)
5.2.9 Control panel display is not operating
Make sure that the control panel is connected securely with the inverter.
Check for a short circuit across terminals PC-SD.
Check that the jumper across terminals + - P1 is fitted securely.
5.2.10 POWER lamp is not lit
Make sure that the wiring and installation are correct.
5.2.11 Parameter write cannot be performed
Make sure that operation is not being performed (signal STF or STR is not ON).
Make sure that you pressed the SET key ( WRITE key) for longer than 1.5 seconds.
Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter outside the setting
range.
Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter in the external
operation mode.
Check Pr. 77 "parameter write inhibit selection".
5
174
5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.3 Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection
The transistorized inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices.
Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to adverse
influence by the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and
vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
5.3.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection
For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the
smoothing capacitor. Therefore, when more than 10 minutes have elapsed after
power-off, make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals + - − of the
inverter is 30VDC or less using a meter, etc. Then, access the inverter for inspection.
5.3.2 Check items
(1) Daily inspection
! Check the following:
1) Motor operation fault
2) Improper installation environment
3) Cooling system fault
4) Unusual vibration and noise
5) Unusual overheating and discoloration
! During operation, check the inverter input voltages using a meter.
(2) Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean state.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in
neutral detergent or ethanol.
Note:
Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they
will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
Do not use detergent or alcohol to clean the display and other sections of the
control panel as these sections may deform.
5.3.3 Periodic inspection
Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
(1) Cooling system: ......Clean the air filter, etc.
(2) Screws and bolts: ...These parts may become loose due to vibration, temperature
changes, etc. Check that they are tightened securely and
retighten as necessary.
(3) Conductors and insulating materials: Check for corrosion and damage.
(4) Insulation resistance: Measure.
(5) Cooling fan, smoothing capacitor: Check and change if necessary.
175
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.3.4 Insulation resistance test using megger
(1)Before performing the insulation resistance test using a megger on the external
circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter so that the test
voltage is not applied to the inverter.
(2)For the continuity test of the control circuit, use a meter (high resistance range) and
do not use the megger or buzzer.
(3)For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as
shown below and do not perform the test on the control circuit. (Use a 500VDC
megger.)
Power supply
L1
L2
L3
Inverter U
V
W
Motor
IM
500VDC
megger
Earth (ground) terminal
5.3.5 Pressure test
Do not conduct a pressure test. The inverter's main circuit uses semiconductors, which
may deteriorate if a pressure test is made.
5
176
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Interval
General
Check ambient
Surrounding
temperature, humidity,
environment
dust, dirt, etc.
Overall unit
Main circuit
Power
supply
voltage
Check for unusual
vibration and noise.
Check that main
circuit voltage is
normal.
Check resistance
across terminals.
Smoothing
capacitor
(1) Check for liquid
leakage.
(2) Check for safety
valve projection
and bulge.
(3) Measure
electrostatic
capacity.
Method
Criterion
Instrument
Thermometer,
hygrometer,
recorder
'
Refer to page 11.
Ambient
temperature:
-10°C to +50°C,
non-freezing.
Ambient
humidity: 90%
or less, noncondensing.
'
Visual and auditory
checks.
No fault.
'
Measure voltage
across inverter
terminals L1-L2-L3.
(1) Check with megger
(across main
circuit terminals
and ground
terminal).
General
(2) Check for loose
screws and bolts.
(3) Check for overheat
on each part.
(4) Clean.
(1) Check conductors
for distortion.
Conductors,
(2) Check cable
cables
sheaths for
breakage.
Terminal
Check for damage.
block
Inverter
module
Converter
module
2 years
Periodic*
Description
1 year
Inspection
Item
Daily
Area of
Inspection
5.3.6 Daily and Periodic Inspection
'
'
'
'
'
Within
permissible AC Meter,
digital
voltage
multimeter
fluctuation
(see page 186)
(1) 5MΩ or
more.
' (1) Disconnect all
cables from
inverter and
measure across
terminals L1, L2,
L3, U, V, W and (2), (3) No
fault.
ground terminal
with megger.
(2) Retighten.
(3) Visual check.
(1), (2) Visual
(1), (2) No
check.
fault.
'
Visual check
No fault
Disconnect cables
from inverter and
measure across
terminals L1, L2, L3 Refer to page
'
↔ +, −, and across 179.
U, V, W ↔ +, − with
a meter with a 100Ω
range.
(1), (2) No
(1), (2) Visual
fault.
check.
'
'
'
(3) Measure with
capacity meter.
177
500VDC
class
megger
Analog
meter
Capacity
(3) 85% or more meter
of rated
capacity.
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Relay
(1) Check for chatter
during operation.
(2) Check for rough
surface on
contacts.
(1) Check balance of
output voltages
across phases with
inverter operated
independently.
Operation (2) Perform sequence
protective
check
operation test to
make sure there is
no fault in
protective or
display circuits.
(1) Check for unusual '
vibration and
Cooling fan
noise.
(2) Check for loose
connection.
(1) Check for LED
'
lamp blown.
Display
Meter
Motor
General
Insulation
resistance
(2) Clean.
Check that reading is
normal.
(1) Check for unusual
vibration and
noise.
(2) Check for unusual
odor.
Check with megger
(across terminals and
ground terminal).
2 years
1 year
Periodic*
Description
Daily
Inspection
Item
Display
Cooling
system
Control circuit
Protective circuit
Main
circuit
Area of
Inspection
Interval
'
Criterion
'
(1) Auditory check.
(1) No fault.
'
(2) Visual check.
(2) No fault.
'
(1) Measure voltage
across inverter
output terminals
U-V-W.
(1) Phase-tophase
voltage
balance
within 8V
(4V) for
400V (200V).
(2) Fault must
occur
because of
sequence.
'
(2) Simulate
connection of
inverter
protective circuit
output terminals.
(1) Turn by hand
with power off.
'
(2) Visual check.
'
(1) Lamps indicate
indicator lamps
on panel.
(2) Clean with rag.
Check reading of
meters on panel.
'
'
Method
Instrument
Digital
multimeter,
rectifier
type
voltmeter
No unusual
vibration and
unusual noise.
(1) Check that
lamps are lit.
Voltmeter,
Must satisfy
ammeter,
specified and
etc.
management
values.
(1), (2) No fault.
(1) Auditory,
sensory, visual
checks.
(2) Check for
unusual odor due
to overheat,
damage, etc.
5MΩ or more.
' Disconnect cables
from U, V, W,
including motor
cables.
500V
megger
Note: The values within the parentheses are for the 200V class.
* For periodic inspection, contact you nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
5
178
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
" Checking the inverter and converter modules
<Preparation>
(1)Disconnect the external power supply cables (L1, L2, L3) and motor cables (U, V,
W).
(2)Prepare a meter. (Use 100Ω range.)
<Checking method>
Change the polarity of the meter alternately at the inverter terminals L1, L2, L3,
U, V, W, + and −, and check for continuity.
Note: 1. Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged.
2. At the time of continuity, the measured value is several to several ten’s-of
ohms depending on the number of modules, number of parallel modules,
circuit tester type, etc. If all measured values are almost the same, the
modules are without fault.
<Module device numbers and terminals to be checked>
Tester
Polarity
Tester
Polarity
Measured
Value
L1
+
Discontinuity
+
L1
Continuity
L2
+
Discontinuity
D2
+
L2
Continuity
L3
+
Discontinuity
D3
+
L3
Continuity
U
+
Discontinuity
TR1
+
U
Continuity
V
+
Discontinuity
TR3
+
V
Continuity
W
+
Discontinuity
TR5
+
W
Continuity
(Assumes the use of an analog meter.)
D4
Converter
module
D1
D5
Inverter module
D6
TR4
TR6
TR2
+
Converter module
−
L1
−
L2
−
L3
−
U
−
V
−
W
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity
Discontinuity
Inverter module
TR1
D1 D2
L1
−
L2
−
L3
−
U
−
V
−
W
−
Measured
Value
TR3
TR5
D3
L1
U
C
L2
V
L3
W
D4 D5 D6
TR4
TR6
TR2
−
Note:
The FR-E520S-0.4K to 2.2K do not have L3, D3 and D6.
179
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.3.7 Replacement of parts
The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structural or physical
characteristics, leading to reduced performance or failure of the inverter. For preventive
maintenance, the parts must be changed periodically.
Part Name
Cooling fan
Smoothing capacitor in main
circuit
Smoothing capacitor on
control board
Standard Replacement
Interval
2 to 3 years
Change (as required)
5 years
Change (as required)
5 years
Change the board
(as required).
Description
Note: For part replacement, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
(1) Cooling fan
The cooling fan cools heat-generating parts such as the main circuit semiconductor
devices. The life of the cooling fan bearing is usually 10,000 to 35,000 hours. Hence,
the cooling fan must be changed every 2 to 3 years if the inverter is run continuously.
When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during inspection, the cooling fan must
be changed immediately.
Inverter Model No.
FR-E540-1.5K to 3.7K-EC
FR-E520S-1.5K, 2.2K-EC
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K-EC
Fan Type
MMF-06D24ES-FC4 BKO-CA1027H09
MMF-06D24ES-FC5 BKO-CA1027H10
5
180
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
" Removal
1) Remove the front cover
(refer to page 5).
2) Unplug the fan connector.
The cooling fan is
connected to the cooling
fan connector beside the
main circuit terminal block
of the inverter.
Unplug the connector.
Fan connector
3) Remove the inverter and
cooling fan.
Push in the direction of
arrow A and pull out in the
direction of arrow B.
A
A
4) Remove the cooling fan
and cooing fan cover.
The cooling fan is
secured by the fixing
catches.
You can remove the
cooling fan and cooling
fan cover by disengaging
the fixing catches.
B
Cooling fan
Cooling fan cover
181
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
" Reinstallation
1) After confirming the
orientation of the fan,
reinstall the fan to the
cover so that the arrow on
the left of "AIR FLOW"
faces in the opposite
direction of the fan cover.
Note: If the air flow is set
in the wrong
direction, the
inverter life can be
shorter.
↑AIR FLOW
2) Reinstall the fan cover to
the inverter.
Run the cable through the
wiring groove to prevent it
from being caught
between the chassis and
cover.
Wiring groove
3) Reconnect the cable to the
connector.
4) Reinstall the inverter front
cover.
Fan connector
5
182
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
(2) Smoothing capacitors
A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing the DC in the
main circuit, and an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is also used for stabilizing the
control power in the control circuit.
Their characteristics are adversely affected by ripple current, etc. When the inverter is
operated in an ordinary, air-conditioned environment, change the capacitors about
every 5 years. When 5 years have elapsed, the capacitors will deteriorate more rapidly.
Check the capacitors at least every year (less than six months if the life will be expired
soon). Check the following:
1) Case (side faces and bottom face for expansion)
2) Sealing plate (for remarkable warp and extreme crack)
3) Appearance, external cracks, discoloration, leakage.
When the measured capacitance of the capacitor has reduced below 85% of the
rating, change the capacitor.
183
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
5.3.8 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
" Measurement of voltages and currents
Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include
harmonics, accurate measurement depends on the instruments used and circuits measured.
When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure the
following circuits using the instruments given on the next page.
Three-phase 400V
power input
Output
voltage
Input
voltage
Input
current
Output
current
Single-phase 200V
power input
Inverter
Ar
3-phase
power
W11
U
L1
Au
Vr
As
W12
V
L2
(Note 2) Vt
To motor
Av
Vv
Vs
At
W21
Vu
W13
W
L3
Aw
W22
Vw
+
−
:Moving-iron type
:Electrodynamometer type
+
V
:Moving-coil type
−
:Rectifier type
Instrument types
Typical Measuring Points and Instruments
Note: 1. Use FFT (Fast Fourier Transforms) to measure the output voltage
accurately.
It cannot be measured accurately with a meter or general instrument.
2. For FR-E520S-0.4K to 2.2K do not use At, As, Vt, Vs, W12 and W13.
184
5
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
Measuring Points and Instruments
Measuring Point
Power supply side
power factor
(Pf1)
Output side
voltage
(V2)
Output side current
(I2)
Output side power
(P2)
Output side power
factor
(Pf2)
Converter output
Frequency setting
signal
Frequency setting
power supply
Frequency
signal
meter
Across L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1
Moving-iron type AC
voltmeter
L1, L2 and L3 line currents
Moving-iron type AC
ammeter
At L1, L2 and L3, and across
L1-L2, L2-L3 and L3-L1
Electrodynamic type
single-phase wattmeter
Remarks
(Reference Measured Value)
Is the commercial power supply
within permissible variation of AC
voltage (Refer to page 186)
P1 = W11 + W12 + W13
(3-wattmeter method)
Calculate after measuring power supply voltage, power supply side current and power supply side
power.
[For three-phase power supply]
[For single-phase power supply]
P1
P1
Pf1=
100%
Pf1=
100%
V1 I1
3V1 I1
(Note 1)
Difference between phases is within
Across U-V, V-W and W-U
(Cannot be measured
±1% of maximum output voltage.
by moving-iron type)
Current should be equal to or less than
Moving-iron type AC
rated inverter current.
U, V and W line currents
ammeter
Difference between phases is 10% or
(Note 2)
lower.
P2 = W21 + W22
At U, V and W, and across U- Electrodynamic
type
2-wattmeter method (or 3-wattmeter
V and V-W
single-phase wattmeter
method)
Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor.
P2
Pf2=
100%
3V2 I2
Inverter LED display is lit. 1.35 × V1
Moving-coil type
Maximum 760V (380V) during
Across + - −
(such as tester)
regenerative operation
Across 2 (positive)-5
0 to 5V/0 to 10VDC
Across 4 (positive)-5
4 to 20mADC
Moving-coil type
Across 10 (positive)-5
5VDC
(Meter, etc. may be
used)
(Internal resistance:
Approximately 10VDC at
50kΩ or larger)
maximum frequency (without
Across AM (positive)-5
frequency meter)
"5" is common.
Power supply
voltage
(V1)
Power supply side
current
(I1)
Power supply side
power
(P1)
Measuring Instrument
Start signal
Select signal
Across STF, STR, RH, RM,
RL, MRS, RES-SD
Reset
Across RES (positive)-SD
Output stop
Across MRS (positive)-SD
Alarm signal
Across A-C
Across B-C
Moving-coil type
(Meter, etc. may be
used)
(Internal resistance:
50kΩ or larger)
20 to 30VDC when open.
ON voltage: 1V or less
Moving-coil type
(such as a meter)
Continuity check
<Normal>
<Fault>
Across A-C: DiscontinuityContinuity
Across B-C: Continuity Discontinuity
SD is
common.
Item
Note: 1. Use FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. It can not be measured accurately with a meter or
general instrumentation.
2. If the carrier frequency exceeds 5kHz, do not use this instrument since using it may increase eddycurrent loss produced in metal parts inside the instrument, leading to burnout.
In this case, use an approximate effective value type instrument.
*The value within the parentheses is for the 200V class.
185
CHAPTER 6
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter provides the "specifications" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment
6.1 Standard Specifications .......................................... 186
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
6.1 Standard Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
6 SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Standard Specifications
6.1.1 Model specifications
(1) 3-phase 400V power supply
Power supply
Output
Type FR-E540K-EC
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
Applicable motor capacity (kW)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
(Note 1)
4.6
7.2
Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2)
1.2
2.0
3.0
9.1
Rated current (A)
(Note 6) 1.6(1.4) 2.6(2.2) 4(3.8) 6(5.4) 9.5(8.7)
12
150% 60 s 200% 0.5 s
Overload capacity
(Note 3)
(inverse-time characteristics)
Voltage (Note 4)
Three phase, 380V to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
Rated input AC voltage,
Three phase, 380V to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
frequency
Permissible AC voltage
325 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
±5%
fluctuation
Power supply system capacity
1.5
2.5
4.5
5.5
9.5
12
(kVA)
(Note 5)
Protective structure (JEM1030)
Enclosed type (IP20)
Cooling system
Self-cooling
Forced air cooling
Approximate weight (kg)
1.9
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.1
3.8
7.5
7.5
13.0
17
17
3.8
Note: 1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable
when a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.
2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.
3. The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the
inverter's rated current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and
motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
4. The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. The
maximum output voltage may be set as desired below the power supply
voltage. However, the crest value of the inverter output voltage remains
unchanged from the DC bus voltage.
5. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables).
6. The rated output current in the parentheses applies when low acoustic noise
operation is to be performed at the ambient temperature higher than 40°C
with the Pr. 72 (PWM frequency selection) value set to 2kHz or higher.
186
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Single-phase 200V power supply
Power supply
Output
Type FR-E520SK-EC
Applicable motor capacity (kW)
(Note 1)
Rated capacity (kVA) (Note 2)
Rated output current (A)
Overload capacity
(Note 3)
Rated output voltage(Note 4)
Rated input AC voltage,
frequency
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
Power supply capacity (kVA)
(Note 5)
Protective structure (JEM1030)
Cooling system
Approximate weight (kg)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
0.95
1.5
2.7
3.8
2.5
4
7
10
150% 60 s 200% 0.5 s (inverse-time characteristics)
Three phase, 200V to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
Single phase, 200V to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
Single phase, 170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz
Within ±5%
1.5
2.3
4.0
5.2
Enclosed type (IP20)
Self-cooling
Forced air cooling
1.9
1.9
2.0
2.0
Note: 1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable
when a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor is used.
Normally, the rated current (at 50Hz) of the motor applied should not exceed
the rated current.
2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V.
3. The overload capacity indicated in % is the ratio of the overload current to the
inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter
and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
4. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The
maximum output voltage may be set as desired below the power supply
voltage. However, the crest value of the inverter output voltage remains
unchanged from the DC bus voltage.
5. The power supply capacity changes with the values of the power supply side
inverter impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables). Use the
power supply capacity larger than the indicated.
6
187
SPECIFICATIONS
6.1.2 Common specifications
Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control can be selected.
V/F control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control can be
selected.
Output frequency range
0.2 to 400Hz (starting frequency variable between 0 and 60Hz)
Across terminals 2-5: 1/500 of maximum set frequency (5VDC input),
Analog input
Frequency
1/1000 (10VDC, 4-20mADC input).
setting
0.01Hz (less than 100Hz), 0.1Hz (100Hz or more) when digital setting
resolution
Digital input
is made using the control panel.
Analog input
Within ±0.5% of maximum output frequency (25°C ±10°C).
Frequency
Within 0.01% of set output frequency when setting is made from
accuracy
Digital input
control panel.
Voltage/frequency
Base frequency set as required between 0 and 400Hz. Constant torque
characteristic
or variable torque pattern can be selected.
150% or more (at 1Hz), 200% or more (at 3Hz) when general-purpose
Starting torque
magnetic flux vector control or slip compensation is selected.
Torque boost
Manual torque boost, 0 to 30% may be set.
0.01, 0.1 to 3600 s (acceleration and deceleration can be set
Acceleration/deceleration time
individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode can be
setting
selected.
Regenerative
0.4K, 0.75K ... 100%, 1.5K ....50%,
(Note 3)
2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K, 7.5K .... 20%
Braking
torque
DC injection
Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s), operation
brake
voltage (0 to 30%) variable.
Current stall prevention
Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% variable), presence or
operation level
absence can be selected.
Voltage stall prevention
Operation level is fixed, presence or absence can be selected.
operation level
Fast-response current limit
Operation level is fixed, presence or absence can be selected.
level
Analog
0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, 4 to 20mADC.
input
Frequency
setting signal
Digital
Entered from control panel (optional FR-PA02-02).
input
Forward rotation and reverse rotation, start signal automatic selfStart signal
holding input (3-wire input) selectable.
Used to reset alarm output provided when protective function is
Alarm reset
activated.
Up to 15 speeds can be selected. (Each speed can be set
Multi-speed selection
between 0 and 400Hz, running speed can be changed
during operation from the control panel.)
Used to select second functions (acceleration time,
Second function selection deceleration time, torque boost, base frequency,
electronic overcurrent protection).
Instantaneous shut-off of inverter output (frequency,
Use
Output stop
voltage).
Pr. 180 to
Used to select input of frequency setting signal 4 to Pr. 183 for
Current input selection
selection.
20mADC (terminal 4).
External thermal relay
Thermal relay contact input for use when the inverter is
input
stopped by the external thermal relay.
PU operation-external
Used to switch between PU operation and external
operation switching
operation from outside the inverter.
V/F-general-purpose
Used to switch between V/F control and general-purpose
magnetic flux switching
magnetic flux vector control from outside the inverter.
Input signals
Control specifications
Control system
188
Display
Operation functions
Output signals
Control specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating status
For meter
Control panel
display
Operating
status
Alarm
definition
LED display
Environment
Protective/alarm functions
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Storage temperature
(Note 2)
Ambience
Altitude, vibration
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation,
external thermal relay input selection, automatic restart operation after
instantaneous power failure, forward/reverse rotation prevention, slip
compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function,
PID control, computer link operation (RS-485).
2 open collector output signals can be selected from inverter running,
up to frequency, frequency detection, overload alarm, zero current
detection, output current detection, PID upper limit, PID lower limit, PID
forward/reverse rotation, operation ready, minor fault and alarm, and 1
contact output (230VAC 0.3A, 30VDC 0.3A) can be selected.
1 signal can be selected from output frequency, output current and
output voltage. Analog output (0 to 10VDC).
Output voltage, output current, set frequency, running.
Alarm definition is displayed when protective function is activated. 4
alarm definitions are stored.
Power application (POWER), Alarm (ALARM).
Overcurrent shut-off (during acceleration, deceleration, constant
speed), regenerative overvoltage shut-off, undervoltage (Note 1),
instantaneous power failure (Note 1), overload shut-off (electronic
overcurrent protection), brake transistor alarm, output short circuit, stall
prevention, brake resistor overheat protection, fin overheat, fan failure
(Note 4), parameter error, PU disconnection, output phase failure
protection, ground fault over current protection.
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
-20°C to +65°C
Indoors (No corrosive and flammable gases, oil mist, dust and dirt.)
Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation.
After that derate by 3% for every extra 500m up to 2500m (91%).
2
5.9m/s or less (conforming to JIS C 0040)
Note: 1. When undervoltage or instantaneous power failure has occurred, alarm
display or alarm output is not provided but the inverter itself is protected.
Overcurrent, regenerative overvoltage or other protection may be activated
at power restoration according to the operating status (load size, etc.)
2. Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.
3. The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which
varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 50Hz in
the shortest time and is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the
motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency,
the average deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not
contain a brake resistor, use the optional brake resistor when regenerative
energy is large. A brake unit (BU) may also be used.
4. Not provided for the FR-E540-0.4K, 0.75K-EC, FR-E520S-0.1K to 0.4K-EC
which are not equipped with a cooling fan.
6
189
SPECIFICATIONS
6.1.3 Outline drawings
" FR-E540-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K-EC
" FR-E520S-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K-EC
150
6
138
6
2-φ5 hole
5
6
128
11
D1
61
D
6
140
Inverter Type
D
D1
FR-E540-0.4K, 0.75K-EC
116 44
FR-E540-1.5K to 3.7K-EC
136 64
FR-E520S-0.4K, 0.75K-EC 136 64
FR-E520S-1.5K, 2.2K-EC
Cooling fan × 1
156 84
Note: There is no cooling fan in the FR-E540-0.4K,
0.75K-EC and FR-E520S-0.4K, 0.75K-EC.
(Unit: mm)
190
SPECIFICATIONS
" FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K-EC
6
138
150
6
2-φ5 hole
5
6
11
6
208
73
64
148
220
Cooling fan × 2
(Unit: mm)
6
191
APPENDIX
A P P E N D IX
This chapter provides "supplementary information" for use
of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
Appendix 1 Data Code List .......................................... 192
Appendix 2 When using the communication option ...... 196
Appendix 1 Data Code List
APPENDIX
Appendix 1 Data Code List
Basic functions
Func- Parameter
tion
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Standard operation functions
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Name
Torque boost
Maximum frequency
Minimum frequency
Base frequency
Multi-speed setting (high speed)
Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
Multi-speed setting (low speed)
Acceleration time
Deceleration time
Electronic thermal O/L relay
DC injection brake operation
frequency
DC injection brake operation time
DC injection brake voltage
Starting frequency
Load pattern selection
Jog frequency
Jog acceleration/deceleration time
High-speed maximum frequency
Base frequency voltage
Acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency
Acceleration/deceleration time
increments
Stall prevention operation level
Stall prevention operation level
compensation factor at double speed
Multi-speed setting (speed 4)
Multi-speed setting (speed 5)
Multi-speed setting (speed 6)
Multi-speed setting (speed 7)
Acceleration/deceleration pattern
Regenerative function selection
Frequency jump 1A
Frequency jump 1B
Frequency jump 2A
Frequency jump 2B
Frequency jump 3A
Frequency jump 3B
Speed display
Frequency at 5V (10V) input
Frequency at 20mA input
Read
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Write
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
Link Parameter Extension
Setting
(Data Code 7F/FF)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0A
8A
0
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
12
13
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
92
93
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
14
94
0
15
95
0
16
96
0
17
97
0
18
19
1A
1B
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
98
99
9A
9B
9D
9E
9F
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Data Code
192
Read
29
2A
Write
A9
AA
Link Parameter Extension
Setting
(Data Code 7F/FF)
0
0
2B
AB
0
2C
AC
0
2D
2E
2F
AD
AE
AF
0
0
0
30
B0
0
34
B4
0
Current monitoring reference
37
38
B7
B8
0
0
57
Restart coasting time
39
B9
0
58
Restart cushion time
3A
BA
0
59
Remote setting function selection
3B
BB
0
3C
BC
0
3D
3E
3F
41
BD
BE
BF
C1
0
0
0
0
42
C2
0
43
C3
0
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4B
CB
0
4D
CD*
0
4E
CE
0
Output
Additional Automatic
Display Second functions terminal
restart
function functions functions
functions
Func- Parameter
tion
Number
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
52
55
56
Second acceleration/deceleration
time
Second deceleration time
Second torque boost
Second V/F (base frequency)
Second electronic thermal O/L
relay
Control panel/PU main display
data selection
Frequency monitoring reference
79
4F
CF*
0
80
Motor capacity
50
D0
0
82
Motor exciting current
52
D2
0
83
Rated motor voltage
53
D3
0
84
Rated motor frequency
54
D4
0
90
Motor constant (R1)
5A
DA
0
96
Auto-tuning setting/status
60
E0
0
61
62
63
65
Operation selection functions
Up-to-frequency sensitivity
Output frequency detection
Output frequency detection for
reverse rotation
Data Code
Shortest acceleration/deceleration
mode
Reference I for intelligent mode
ref. I for intelligent mode accel
ref. I for intelligent mode decel
Retry selection
Stall prevention operation level
reduction starting frequency
Number of retries at alarm
occurrence
Retry waiting time
Retry count display erasure
Special regenerative brake duty
Applied motor
PWM frequency selection
0-5V/0-10V selection
Filter time constant
Reset selection/disconnected PU
detection/PU stop selection
Parameter write disable selection
Reverse rotation prevention
selection
Operation mode selection
60
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
77
78
General-purpose
magnetic flux
vector control
Name
*Write is disabled for NET mode communication.
193
Communication
functions
Func- Parameter
tion
Number
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
PID control
124
128
129
130
131
132
133
Read
11
12
13
14
15
Write
91
92
93
94
95
16
96
1
17
97
1
18
98
1
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
9C
9D
9E
9F
A0
1
1
1
1
1
21
A1
1
22
A2
1
2D
AD
1
Additional
function
Parameter unit language switchover
146
Parameter set by manufacturer. Do not set.
Current
detection
150
151
152
153
Output current detection level
Output current detection period
Zero current detection level
Zero current detection period
32
33
34
35
B2
B3
B4
B5
1
1
1
1
Sub
function
156
Stall prevention operation
selection
38
B8
1
158
AM terminal function selection
3A
BA
1
160
User group read selection
00
80
2
171
Actual operation hour meter clear
0B
8B
2
173
User group 1 registration
0D
8D
2
174
User group 1 deletion
0E
8E
2
175
User group 2 registration
0F
8F
2
176
User group 2 deletion
10
90
2
180
RL terminal function selection
14
94
2
181
RM terminal function selection
15
95
2
Terminal
assignment functions
User
functions
145
Additional
function
Station number
Communication speed
Stop bit length
Parity check presence/absence
Number of communication retries
Communication check time
interval
Waiting time setting
CR⋅LF presence/absence
selection
PID action selection
PID proportional band
PID integral time
Upper limit
Lower limit
PID action set point for PU
operation
PID differential time
Link Parameter Extension
Setting
(Data Code 7F/FF)
1
1
1
1
1
Data Code
Initial
monitor
134
Name
182
RH terminal function selection
16
96
2
183
MRS terminal function selection
17
97
2
190
RUN terminal function selection
1E
9E
2
191
FU terminal function selection
1F
9F
2
192
A, B, C terminal function selection
20
A0
2
194
Data Code
Computer link Additional
function
function
Stop selection
function
Sub functions
Multi-speed operation
Func- Parameter
tion
Number
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
244
245
246
DeviceNet
functions
Multi-speed setting (speed 9)
Multi-speed setting (speed 10)
Multi-speed setting (speed 11)
Multi-speed setting (speed 12)
Multi-speed setting (speed 13)
Multi-speed setting (speed 14)
Multi-speed setting (speed 15)
Soft-PWM setting
Cooling fan operation selection
Rated motor slip
Slip compensation response time
Read
Write
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
34
35
36
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B4
B5
B6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Constant-output region slip
compensation selection
37
B7
2
250
Stop selection
3A
BA
2
251
Output phase failure protection
selection
analog polarity reversible lower
limit
3B
BB
2
3E
BE
2
Operation command right
26
27
28
2A
A6
A7
A8
AA
3
2D
AD
3
2E
AE
3
2F
AF
3
30
B0
3
00
80
5
01
81
5
02
5D
5E
5F
60
61
82
DD
DE
DF
E0
E1
5
5A
5B
DA
DB
9
254
338*
339*
340*
342
346**
347**
348**
Additional
Function
Multi-speed setting (speed 8)
Link Parameter Extension
Setting
(Data Code 7F/FF)
247
345**
Calibration functions
Name
500***
501***
502***
901
902
903
904
905
990
991
Speed command right
Link start mode selection
2
E PROM write selection
DeviceNet Address Startup Data
(Lower byte)
DeviceNet Baudrate Startup Data
(Lower byte)
DeviceNet Address Startup Data
(Higher byte)
DeviceNet Baudrate Startup Data
(Higher byte)
Communication error execution
waiting time
Communication error occurrence
count indication
Error-time stop mode selection
AM terminal calibration
Frequency setting voltage bias
Frequency setting voltage gain
Frequency setting current bias
Frequency setting current gain
Buzzer control
LCD contrast
* NET mode communication, fitted with communication option.
** Fitted with FR-E5ND.
*** Fitted with communication option.
195
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
9
Appendix 2 When using the communication option.
Appendix 2 When using the communicaton option.
The extended functions for E.OPT error and E. 3 error have been added to this
instruction manual. (Pr. 500 to Pr. 502)
(1) Pr. 500 "communication error execution waiting time"
You can set the waiting time from occurrence of a communication line fault to
communication error indication "E.OPT".
Parameter
Number
500
Setting Range
0 to 999.8 s
Minimum Setting
Increment
0.1 s
Communication line status
Normal
Factory Setting
0
Abnormal
Communication error "E.OPT"
Indication output
Time set in Pr. 500
If a communication line fault still persists after the time set in Pr. 500 has elapsed, it is
recognized as a communication error and the communication error indication "E.OPT"
is output.
If communication is restored to normal during the set time, operation is continued
without a communication error indication.
(2) Pr. 501 "communication error occurrence count indication"
You can display the cumulative number of communication line faults that occurred.
Write "0" to Pr. 501 to clear the communication error occurrence count.
Parameter
Number
501
Setting Range
0
Minimum Setting
Increment
1
Factory Setting
0
Count timing according to
communication line status
Normal
Abnormal
Normal
1 count
Abnormal
1 count
At the time when a communication line fault occurs, one count is made in Pr. 501
"communication error occurrence count indication".
Note: The communication error occurrence count indication is temporarily stored in
RAM.
As it is reflected to E2PROM per hour only, performing power-on reset or
inverter reset causes the last value stored in E2PROM to appear in the
parameter.
196
(3) Pr. 502 "error-time stop mode selection"
You can choose inverter operation to be performed in the occurrence of a
communication error or an option error.
Parameter
Number
502
Setting Range
0, 1, 2
Minimum Setting
Increment
1
Factory Setting
0
(About the settings)
Option error
Communication line
Fault
Error Recognition after
At Occurrence of Fault
Pr. 500 Time
Pr. 502
Setting Operating
IndiAlarm Operating
IndiAlarm
status
cation
output
status
cation
output
Not
Coasting
0
Continued
No
E.OPT lit Provided
provided
to stop
DeceleNot
E.OPT lit Provided
1
Continued
No
ration to
provided
after stop after stop
stop
DeceleNot
E.OPT lit
Not
2
Continued
No
ration to
provided
after stop provided
stop
Coasting
Coasting
Provided
0
E.3 lit
Provided
E.3 lit
to stop
to stop
DeceleDeceleProvided
E.3 lit
E.3 lit
Provided
1
ration to
ration to
after stop after stop
after stop after stop
stop
stop
DeceleDeceleProvided
E.3 lit
E.3 lit
Provided
2
ration to
ration to
after stop after stop
after stop after stop
stop
stop
At Resolution of Fault
Operating
status
Stop held
Indication
E.OPT
kept lit
Alarm
output
Provided
Stop held
E.OPT
kept lit
Provided
Restart
E.OPT
kept lit
Not
provided
Stop held
E.3 kept
lit
Provided
Stop held
E.3 kept
lit
Provided
Stop held
E.3 kept
lit
Provided
Note: 1. A communication error [E.OPT (fault data: A0H)] is a fault on the
communication line, and a communication error [E. 3 (fault data: F3H)] is a
communication error inside the inverter.
2. The alarm output is the ABC contact output or alarm bit output.
3. If the Pr. 502 setting is 1 or 2, the deceleration time is the ordinary
deceleration time setting (Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45).
4. The acceleration time at restart is the ordinary acceleration time setting (Pr. 7,
Pr. 44).
5. If the Pr. 502 setting is 2, the operation command/speed command at restart
follows the command before occurrence of a fault.
6. For the setting of alarm output, the fault definition is stored in the alarm history.
(Write to the alarm history is performed when the alarm output is provided.)
If the alarm output is not provided, the fault definition overwrites the alarm
indication of the alarm history temporarily but is not stored.
After the fault is cleared, the alarm indication is reset and returns to the
ordinary monitor and the alarm history returns to the original alarm history.
7. When a communication line fault, which occurred at the Pr. 502 setting of 2, is
cleared during deceleration, acceleration restarts at that point. (Acceleration
does not restart at occurrence of a Option fault.)
197
For maximum Safety
• Mitsubishi general-purpose inverters are not designed or manufactured to be
used in equipment or systems in situations that can affect or endanger human
life.
• When considering this product for operation in special applications such as
machinery or systems used in passenger transportation, medical, aerospace,
atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating applications, please
contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
• Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality
control, you are strongly advised to install safety devices to forestall serious
accidents when it is used in facilities where a breakdown in the product is
likely to cause a serious accident.
• Please do not use this product for loads other than 3-phase induction motors.
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date
*Manual Number
Mar., 1999 IB(NA)-0600002-A First edition
Apr., 1999
IB(NA)-0600002-B
Jun., 1999 IB(NA)-0600002-C
Mar., 2000 IB(NA)-0600002-D
Revision
Modifications
•Instructions for compliance with the UL and CSA standards
Factory setting of Pr. 4 "Multi-speed setting (high speed)"
Modifications
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection" = "10", "11" setting method
Modifications
•Alarm indications (E. 6, E. 7)
•Control circuit terminal screw tightening torque
•Instructions for compliance with U.S. and Canadian Electrical
Codes
Partial additions
Pr. 12 "DC injection brake voltage"
Pr. 73 "0-5V/0-10V selection"
Nov., 2000 IB(NA)-0600002-E
Additions
•Pr. 251 "output phase failure protection selection"
•Pr. 342 "E2PROM write selection"
Modifications
•Instructions for compliance with U.S. and Canadian Electrical
Codes
Jul., 2001
IB(NA)-0600002-F
Additions
• Pr. 254 "analog polarity reversible lower limit"
• Pr. 338 "operation command right" (NET mode only)
• Pr. 339 "speed command right" (NET mode only)
• Pr. 340 "link start mode selection" (NET mode only)
• When using the communication option
• For maximum safety
Modifications
• Pr. 119 "stop bit length"
• Pr. 342 "E2PROM write selection"
• Alarm indications (E. 3, E. OPT)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
HEADQUARTERS
EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES
EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES
EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
EUROPE
EUROPE B.V.
German Branch
Gothaer Straße 8
D-40880 Ratingen
Phone: +49 (0) 21 02 / 486-0
Fax: +49 (0) 21 02 / 4 86-1 12
e mail: megfamail@meg.mee.com
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
FRANCE
EUROPE B.V.
French Branch
25, Boulevard des Bouvets
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex
Phone: +33 1 55 68 55 68
Fax: +33 1 49 01 07 25
e mail: factory.automation@fra.mee.com
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
ITALY
EUROPE B.V.
Italian Branch
Via Paracelso 12
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MI)
Phone: +39 039 6053 1
Fax: +39 039 6053 312
e mail: factory.automation@it.mee.com
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
SPAIN
EUROPE B.V.
Spanish Branch
Carretera de Rubí 76-80
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés
Phone: +34 9 3 / 565 3131
Fax: +34 9 3 / 589 2948
e mail: industrial@sp.mee.com
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
UK
EUROPE B.V.
UK Branch
Travellers Lane
GB-Hatfield Herts. AL10 8 XB
Phone: +44 (0) 1707 / 27 61 00
Fax: +44 (0) 1707 / 27 86 95
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
JAPAN
CORPORATION
Office Tower “Z” 14 F
8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku
Tokyo 104-6212
Phone: +81 3 / 622 160 60
Fax: +81 3 / 622 160 75
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
USA
AUTOMATION
500 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, IL 60061
Phone: +1 847 / 478 21 00
Fax: +1 847 / 478 22 83
GEVA
AUSTRIA
Wiener Straße 89
A-2500 Baden
Phone: +43 (0) 2252 / 85 55 20
Fax: +43 (0) 2252 / 488 60
e mail: office@geva.co.at
Getronics b.v.
BELGIUM
Control Systems
Pontbeeklaan 43
B-1731 Asse-Zellik
Phone: +32 (0) 2 / 4 67 17 51
Fax: +32 (0) 2 / 4 67 17 45
e mail: infoautomation@getronics.com
TELECON CO.
BULGARIA
4, A. Ljapchev Blvd.
BG-1756 Sofia
Phone: +359 92 / 97 44 05 8
Fax: +359 92 / 97 44 06 1
e mail: —
AutoCont
CZECHIA
Control Systems s.r.o.
Nemocnicni 12
CZ-70200 Ostrava 2
Phone: +420 (0) 69 / 615 21 11
Fax: +420 (0) 69 / 615 21 12
e mail: info@autocont.cz
louis poulsen
DENMARK
industri & automation
Geminivej 32
DK-2670 Greve
Phone: +45 (0) 43 / 95 95 95
Fax: +45 (0) 43 / 95 95 91
e mail: lpia@lpmail.com
UTU Elektrotehnika AS
ESTONIA
Pärnu mnt.160i
EE-10621 Tallinn
Phone: +372 6 / 51 72 80
Fax: +372 6 / 51 72 88
e mail: utu@utu.ee
URHO POWEL OY
FINLAND
Box 236
FIN-28101 Pori
Telefon: +358 (0) 2 / 550 800
Telefax: +358 (0) 2 / 550 8841
e mail:
tehoelektroniikka@urhotuominen.fi
UTECO A.B.E.E.
GREECE
5, Mavrogenous Str.
GR-18542 Piraeus
Phone: +30 (0) 1 / 42 10 050
Fax: +30 (0) 1 / 42 12 033
e mail: uteco@uteco.gr
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
IRELAND
EUROPE B.V. – Irish Branch
Westgate Business Park
Ballymount
IRL-Dublin 24
Phone: +353 (0) 1 / 419 88 00
Fax: +353 (0) 1 / 419 88 90
e mail: sales.info@meuk.mee.com
ALFATRADE LTD.
MALTA
99 Paola Hill
Paola PLA 08
Phone: +356 / 697816
Fax: +356 / 697817
e mail: paul.licari@alfatrx.com
Getronics bv
NETHERLANDS
Control Systems
Donauweg 2B
NL-1043 AJ Amsterdam
Phone: +31 (0) 20 / 587 68 30
Fax: +31 (0) 20 / 587 68 39
e mail: info.gia@getronics.com
Beijer Electronics AS
NORWAY
Teglverksveien 1
N-3002 Drammen
Phone: +47 (0) 32 / 24 30 00
Fax: +47 (0) 32 / 84 85 77
e mail: —
MPL Technology SP. Z.o.o
POLAND
ul. Wroclawska 53
PL-30-011 Kraków
Phone: +48 (0) 12 / 632 28 85
Fax: +48 (0) 12 / 632 47 82
e mail: krakow@mpl.com.pl
Sirius Trading & Services srl ROMANIA
Bd. Ghica nr. 112, Bl. 41
RO-72335 Bucaresti 2
Phone: +40 (0) 1 / 210 55 11
Fax: +40 (0) 1 / 210 55 11
e mail: sirius_t_s@fx.ro
ACP AUTOCOMP a.s.
SLOVAKIA
Chalupkova 7
SK-81109 Bratislava
Phone: +421 (0) 7 592 22 54
Fax: +421 (0) 7 592 22 48
e mail: —
INEA d.o.o.
SLOVENIA
Ljubljanska 80
SI-1230 Domžale
Phone: +386 (0) 17 21 80 00
Fax: +386 (0) 17 24 16 72
e mail: inea@inea.si
Beijer Electronics AB
SWEDEN
Box 426
S-20123 Malmö
Phone: +46 (0) 40 / 35 86 00
Fax: +46 (0) 40 / 93 23 02
e mail: info@beijer.se
ECONOTEC AG
SWITZERLAND
Postfach 282
CH-8309 Nürensdorf
Phone: +41 (0) 1 / 838 48 11
Fax: +41 (0) 1 / 838 48 12
e mail: info@econotec.ch
GTS
TURKEY
Darülaceze Cad. No. 43A KAT: 2
TR-80270 Okmeydani-Istanbul
Phone: +90 (0) 212 / 320 1640
Fax: +90 (0) 212 / 320 1649
e mail: gts@turk.net
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
RUSSIA
EUROPE B.V.
Moscow Representative Office
52 Kosmodamianskaya Nab., bld. 5
RUS-113054 Moskow
Phone: +7 (0) 95 / 721 2070
Fax: +7 (0) 95 / 721 2071
e mail: info@mitsubishi-electric.ru
STC Drive Technique
RUSSIA
Poslannikov per., 9, str.1
RUS-107005 Moskow
Phone: +7 (0) 95 / 786 21 00
Fax: +7 (0) 95 / 786 21 01
e mail: —
JV-CSC Automation
UKRAINE
15, M. Raskovoyi St., Floor 10,
Office 1010
U-02002 Kiev
Phone: +380 (4) 4 / 238 83 16
Fax: +380 (4) 4 / 238 83 17
e mail: mkl@csc-a.kiev.ua
MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE
SHERF Motion Techn. LTD
ISRAEL
Rehov Hamerkava 19
IL-58851 Holon
Phone: +972 (0) 3 / 559 54 62
Fax: +972 (0) 3 / 556 01 82
e mail: —
AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE
INV 12.01 - Printed in Germany
Circuit Breaker
SOUTH AFRICA
Industries Ltd.
Private Bag 2016
ZAF-1600 Isando
Phone: +2711 928 2000
Fax: +2 711 392 23 54
e mail: cbi@cbi.co.za
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Gothaer Strasse 8 Phone: +49 2102 486-0
Fax:
+49 2102 486-717 www.mitsubishi-automation.de
D-40880 Ratingen Hotline: +49 2102 1805 000-765 megfa-mail@meg.mee.com www.mitsubishi-automation.com